all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
various |
|
Host Manual-1 | Users Manual | 2.21 MiB | ||||
various |
|
Host Manual-2 | Users Manual | 1.28 MiB | ||||
various |
|
OEM Guide | Users Manual | 249.51 KiB | ||||
various |
|
OEM user manual | Users Manual | 249.62 KiB | ||||
various |
|
OLD SAMPLE USER MANUAL | Users Manual | 51.80 KiB | June 03 2012 | |||
various |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 698.04 KiB | December 07 2012 / September 01 2013 | |||
various |
|
Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.45 MiB | February 04 2012 | |||
various |
|
Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.94 MiB | February 04 2012 | |||
various |
|
user guide | Users Manual | 1.49 MiB | September 03 2012 | |||
various |
|
user manual | Users Manual | 550.18 KiB | ||||
various |
|
user manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.26 MiB | December 04 2012 | |||
various |
|
user manual 2 | Users Manual | 333.16 KiB | December 04 2012 | |||
various |
|
Host Internal Photo | Internal Photos | 200.18 KiB | ||||
various |
|
Int | Internal Photos | 227.88 KiB | ||||
various |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 845.71 KiB | December 07 2012 / September 01 2013 | |||
various |
|
Internal Photos 1 | Internal Photos | 2.63 MiB | ||||
various |
|
Internal Photos 2 | Internal Photos | 2.45 MiB | ||||
various |
|
internal photo | Internal Photos | 664.41 KiB | December 04 2012 | |||
various |
|
Ext | External Photos | 605.44 KiB | ||||
various |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 532.93 KiB | December 07 2012 / September 01 2013 | |||
various |
|
Host External Photo | External Photos | 1.53 MiB | ||||
various |
|
external photo | External Photos | 559.04 KiB | December 04 2012 | |||
various |
|
Host Label | ID Label/Location Info | 72.42 KiB | ||||
various |
|
ID label/Location info | ID Label/Location Info | 172.84 KiB | December 04 2012 | |||
various |
|
ID label/Location info rev | ID Label/Location Info | 162.86 KiB | ||||
various |
|
LABEL | ID Label/Location Info | 61.09 KiB | July 03 2012 | |||
various |
|
Label Info | ID Label/Location Info | 102.14 KiB | February 04 2012 | |||
various |
|
Label Location | ID Label/Location Info | 14.40 KiB | December 07 2012 | |||
various |
|
Label Sample | ID Label/Location Info | 31.77 KiB | December 07 2012 | |||
various |
|
Agent authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 62.62 KiB | September 05 2013 | |||
various |
|
C2PC request letter | Cover Letter(s) | 50.85 KiB | September 05 2013 | |||
various |
|
Request for confidentiality | Cover Letter(s) | 65.44 KiB | September 05 2013 | |||
various | Test Report | September 05 2013 | ||||||
various | Test Report | September 05 2013 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | September 05 2013 / March 11 2013 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | September 05 2013 / March 11 2013 | ||||||
various |
|
Authorization letter | Cover Letter(s) | 100.25 KiB | ||||
various |
|
C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 110.18 KiB | ||||
various |
|
Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 20.67 KiB | ||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various |
|
confidential Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 51.88 KiB | ||||
various |
|
Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 26.47 KiB | December 07 2012 | |||
various | RF Exposure Info | December 07 2012 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | December 07 2012 / September 01 2013 | ||||||
various |
|
Class 2 Permissive Change letter | Cover Letter(s) | 44.55 KiB | December 04 2012 | |||
various | RF Exposure Info | December 04 2012 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | December 04 2012 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | December 04 2012 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | December 04 2012 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | December 04 2012 | ||||||
various |
|
declaration of authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 38.32 KiB | December 04 2012 | |||
various | Test Report | December 04 2012 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | December 04 2012 | ||||||
various |
|
Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 35.13 KiB | June 04 2012 / December 04 2012 | |||
various | Test Report | June 04 2012 / December 04 2012 | ||||||
various |
|
Class II Change Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 28.81 KiB | February 04 2012 | |||
various | RF Exposure Info | February 04 2012 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | February 04 2012 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | February 04 2012 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | February 04 2012 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | February 04 2012 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | February 04 2012 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various |
|
LOA letter | Cover Letter(s) | 30.17 KiB | ||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various |
|
CONFIDENTIAL REQUEST LETTER | Cover Letter(s) | 181.16 KiB | July 03 2012 | |||
various |
|
Confidentiality request | Cover Letter(s) | 31.37 KiB | January 03 2012 | |||
various |
|
Permissive change letter | Cover Letter(s) | 28.76 KiB | January 03 2012 | |||
various |
|
CCS Authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 115.51 KiB | ||||
various |
|
Confid Request | Cover Letter(s) | 32.50 KiB | ||||
various |
|
Modular Approval Request | Cover Letter(s) | 22.40 KiB | ||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos |
various | Host Manual-1 | Users Manual | 2.21 MiB |
Lenovo IdeaPad U510 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 2 V1.1_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Note Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (July 2012) Copyright Lenovo 2012. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer .......................................... 1 Top view.......................................................................................................................1 Left-side view ..............................................................................................................3 Right-side view............................................................................................................4 Front view ....................................................................................................................5 Bottom view .................................................................................................................6 Chapter 2. Learning the basics.............................................................. 7 First use.........................................................................................................................7 Using AC adapter and battery ..................................................................................9 Using the touchpad...................................................................................................10 Using the keyboard...................................................................................................11 Connecting external devices....................................................................................14 Special keys and buttons..........................................................................................17 System status indicators...........................................................................................18 Securing your computer...........................................................................................20 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet................................................. 21 Wired connection ......................................................................................................21 Wireless connection ..................................................................................................23 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system..................................................... 24 OneKey Rescue system ............................................................................................24 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting ................................................................. 27 Frequently asked questions .....................................................................................27 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................29 Trademarks............................................................................................ 34 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b c d e f g Note: The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product.
Attention:
Do NOT open the display panel beyond 130 degrees. When closing the display panel, be careful NOT to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged.
The parts bounded by dashed lines are internally installed. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a b c d e Integrated camera Computer display The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant Use the camera for video communication. Wireless module antennas visual output. The built-in antennas ensure optimal reception of wireless radio. Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 18. f Touchpad The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Note: For details, see Using the touchpad on page 10. g Speakers The stereo speakers provide rich and powerful sound. 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b c d e f g h a OneKey Rescue system button Press this button to start the OneKey Rescue system when the computer is powered off. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 24. b Fan louvers Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that none of the fan louvers are blocked or else overheating of the computer may occur. c RJ-45 port This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 21. Display port Connects to external display devices. HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. d e f USB port Connect to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 15. g Combo audio jack Connects to headphones or headsets. The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. Note: Recording may not be supported if third-party headphones or headsets are connected, due to different industry standards. h Built-in microphone The built-in microphone (with noise reduction) can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or simple audio recordings. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b c d a USB port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 15. b Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 14. c d Optical drive Reads/Burns optical disks. AC power adapter jack Connect the AC adapter here. Note: For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 9. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Front view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a a System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 18. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a a Louvers Allow air to enter the computer for cooling. 6 Chapter 2. Learning the basics First use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Reading the manuals Read the supplied manuals before using your computer.
Conncting to the power The built-in battery pack is not fully charged at purchase. To charge the battery and begin using your computer, connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is automatically charged while the computer is running on AC power. Connecting the computer to an electrical outlet 1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC power adapter jack of the computer firmly. 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
Turning on the computer Press the power button to turn on the computer.
Configuring the operating system You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below.
Accepting the end user license agreement
Configuring the Internet connection
Registering the operating system
Creating a user account 7 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Putting your computer into sleep state or shutting it down When you finish working with your computer, you can put it into sleep state or shut it down. Putting your computer into sleep state If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer into sleep state. When the computer is in sleep state, you can quickly wake it to resume use, and bypass the startup process. To put the computer into sleep state, click menu. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is and select Sleep from the Start in sleep state) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following.
Press the power button.
Press any key on the keyboard.
Shutting down your computer If you are not going to use your computer for a day or two, shut it down. To shut down your computer, click menu. and select Shut down from the Start 8 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using AC adapter and battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Checking battery status You can determine the percentage of battery power remaining by checking the battery icon in the notification area. Note: As each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:
The amount of energy stored in the battery when you commence work.
The way you use your computer: for example, how often you access the hard disk drive and how bright you make the computer display.
Charging the battery If the battery power is low, you need to charge the battery. You need to charge the battery in any of the following situations:
If the battery status indicator starts blinking
If the battery has not been used for a long time Note:
To increase the life of the battery pack, the computer does not start recharging the battery immediately after it drops from fully charged.
Charge the battery at a temperature between 50 F and 86 F (10 C-30 C).
Full charge or discharge is not required.
Battery Protection If the battery pack remains idle for a long time, the battery may be over-discharged, and its degradation speed may be increased. The battery pack of IdeaPad U series uses the battery protection technology. When your computer remains idle for a long time, the battery pack enters the sleep mode to avoid over-discharge. After the battery pack enters the sleep mode, you cannot turn the computer on without using the power adapter. Please connect the power adapter to the computer to activate the battery pack. Note: The batter pack is in the sleep mode by default. When you use the computer for the first time, please plug the power adapter into it. Otherwise, the computer cannot be turned on. 9 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the touchpad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
d a a Touchpad b Left-click area c Right-click area b c To move the cursor on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the cursor to move. The function corresponds to that of the left mouse button on a conventional mouse, which can be implemented by clicking this area. The function corresponds to that of the right mouse button on a conventional mouse, which can be implemented by clicking this area. Note: You can enable/disable the touchpad by pressing d
. 10 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the keyboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Your computer has function keys incorporated in its standard keyboard.
Function key combinations By pressing the appropriate function keys, you can change system settings instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn
, then press one of the function keys a
. b a Fn + End:
Fn + PgUp:
Fn + PgDn:
The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + Home:
Activate the pause function. Activate the break function. Enable/Disable the scroll lock. Activate the insert function. b 11 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Hotkeys Using hotkeys The hotkeys are located in the function key row of the keyboard. By pressing the appropriate hotkey, you can change system settings instantly. The following describes the function of each hotkey.
: Mute/Unmute.
: Increase sound volume.
: Refresh desktop or Web pages. Open the interface for integrated wireless devices settings (on/off).
:
: Decrease sound volume.
: Close active window or program.
: Enable/Disable the touchpad.
: Enable/Disable the built-in microphone.
: Turn on/off the integrated camera.
: Open the interface for changing display devices.
: Decrease display brightness.
: Increase display brightness. 12 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Setting hotkey mode By default, the hotkey functions are accessible by pressing the appropriate hotkey. However, you can disable the hotkey mode in the BIOS setup utility. To disable the hotkey mode:
1 Restart the computer. When the Lenovo logo appears, immediately press Fn + F2 to enter the BIOS setup utility. 2 In the BIOS setup utility, open the Configuration menu, and change the setting of HotKey Switch from Hotkey Mode to Legacy Mode. 3 Open the Exit menu, and select Exit Saving Changes. Note: When hotkey mode is disabled, press the Fn key and the appropriate hotkey to access the corresponding hotkey function. 13 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting external devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Your computer has a wide range of built-in features and connection capabilities.
Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:
Secure Digital (SD) card
MultiMediaCard (MMC) Note:
This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Insert ONLY one card in the slot at a time. Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it via Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 14 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Connecting USB devices You can connect a USB device to your computer by inserting its USB plug
(Type A) into the USB port on your computer. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver is installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after connecting it, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data by that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area of Windows to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 15 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Connecting Bluetooth enabled device (on select models) If your computer has an integrated Bluetooth adapter card, it can connect to and transfer data wirelessly to other Bluetooth enabled devices, such as notebook computers, PDAs and cell phones. You can transfer data between these devices without cables and up to 10 meters range in open space. Note: The actual maximum range may vary due to interference and transmission barriers. To get the best possible connection speed, place the device as near your computer as possible. Enabling Bluetooth communications on your computer Press to make configuration. Note:
When you do not need to use the Bluetooth function, turn it off to save battery power.
You need to pair the Bluetooth enabled device with your computer before you can transfer data between them. Read the documentation supplied with the Bluetooth enabled device for details on how to pair the device with your computer. 16 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Special keys and buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a
OneKey Rescue system button a
When the computer is powered off, press this button to start the OneKey Rescue system.
In the Windows operating system, press this button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 24. 17 Chapter 2. Learning the basics System status indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
These indicators inform you of the computer status. a b a b Power status indicator Battery status indicator 18 No. Symbol Indicator a b Power Battery Chapter 2. Learning the basics Indicator status On (solid white) Blinking Off On (solid white) Solid amber Fast blinking amber Slow blinking amber Slow blinking white Off Meaning The computer is powered on. The computer is in sleep mode. The computer is powered off. The battery has more than 20% charge. The battery has between 5%
and 20% charge. The battery has less than 5%
charge. The battery is being charged. When battery charge reaches 20%, the blinking color changes to white. The battery has between 20%
and 80% charge and is still charging. When the battery reaches 80% charge the light will stop blinking, but charging will continue until the battery is fully charged. The battery is detached. 19 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Securing your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This section provides information about how to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.
Using passwords Using passwords helps prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a password and enable it, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. The computer cannot be used unless you enter the correct password. Note: This password can be from one to seven alphanumeric characters in any combination. For details about how to set the password, see the Help to the right of the screen in BIOS setup utility. Note: To enter BIOS setup utility, press Fn + F2 (when HotKey Switch is set to Hotkey Mode) or F2 (when HotKey Switch is set to Legacy Mode) when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up. 20 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet As a global network, the Internet connects computers worldwide, providing services such as e-mailing, information searching, electronic commerce, Web browsing and entertainment. You can connect the computer to the Internet in the following way:
Wired connection: use physical wiring to connect. Wireless network technology: connect without wiring. Wired connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wired connections are a reliable and safe way to connect the computer to the Internet. Cable Cable Internet services use a cable modem connected to the residential cable TV line. DSL is a family of related technologies that bring high-
speed network access to homes and small businesses over ordinary telephone lines. DSL
Hardware connection Cable DSL TV cable Telephone line Splitter *
*
Splitter *
Cable modem *
DSL modem *
*
*
* Not supplied. Note: The above diagrams are for reference only. Actual connection method may vary.
*
21 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet
Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 22 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Wireless connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wireless connections provide mobile access to the Internet, allowing you to stay online anywhere the wireless signal covers. Divided by the signal scales, wireless connection to the Internet can be built based on the following standards. Wi-Fi WiMAX Wi-Fi networks cover a small physical area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings. An access point is necessary for the connection. WiMAX networks connect several Wireless LAN systems to cover a metropolitan area, providing high-
speed broadband access without the need for cables. Note: Your computer may not support all wireless connection methods.
Using Wi-Fi/WiMAX (on select models) Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless communications, do the following:
Press Hardware connection to make configuration. Wi-Fi/WiMAX network Access point *
* Not supplied Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and search Windows Help and Support Center for details on how to configure your computer. 23 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system OneKey Rescue system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Introduction The Lenovo OneKey Rescue system is an easy-to-use application that can be used to back up the data on your system partition (C drive) for easy restore when required. You can run Lenovo OneKey Recovery under the Windows operating system, and the OneKey Rescue system without starting the Windows operating system. Attention:
In order to utilize the features of the OneKey Rescue system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and OneKey Rescue system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons and is the reason the available disk space is less than it claims. The exact available hard disk space depends on the file size of the mirror image file (based on the size of operating system and preinstalled software).
Using Lenovo OneKey Recovery (within Windows operating system) In Windows operating system, double click the OneKey Recovery system Icon on the desktop to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Within the program, you can back up the system partition on the hard disk drive, other storage devices, or by creating recovery discs. Note:
The backup process and creation of recovery discs may take some time, connect the AC adapter and battery pack to your computer.
After the recovery discs are burned, please number them so that you can use them in the correct order.
Computers without an integrated optical drive support the creation of recovery discs;
however an appropriate external optical drive is needed to physically create the recovery discs. For more instructions, see the Help file of Lenovo OneKey Recovery. 24 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system
Using Lenovo OneKey Rescue system (without Windows operating system) In the event that the operating system cannot be loaded, follow the steps below to access OneKey Rescue system.
Shut down your computer.
Press the key to launch OneKey Rescue system. Within the program, you can choose to restore your system partition to the original factory status, or to a previously generated backup. Note: The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any critical data before using the recovery feature.
Creating a recovery disc(s) Your computer does not ship with a recovery disc. You can use Lenovo OneKey Recovery system to create a recovery disc(s), which can be used to start and restore your computer in case of a system failure. To create a recovery disc(s):
Insert a recordable disc into the optical drive on your computer. Note: If your computer does not come with an integrated optical drive or if the integrated optical drive does not support disc creating, connect an appropriate external optical drive to your computer.
In Windows, press the OneKey Rescue system button to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery system.
On the main screen, click Create Recovery Disc.
Choose the type of recovery disc(s). You can create three types of recovery disc(s): recovery disc(s) with existing backup image, recovery disc(s) from the current system partition, and factory default recovery disc(s). Select the type of recovery disc you want to create and follow the on-screen instructions. 25 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system
Insert additional recordable disc(s) when prompted. Note:
The estimated number of discs needed will be displayed before the process of creating the recovery disc(s) begins. To minimize the number of discs needed, use recordable DVDs as the media. Also make sure your optical drive is compatible with the disc intended for use.
After recovery disc creation, number the discs appropriately for use in their correct order. The first disc created will be used to start the computer in the case of a system failure. 26 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This section lists frequently asked questions and tells where you can find detailed answers. What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?
See Chapter 1. Important safety information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. How can I prevent problems with my computer?
See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. What are the main hardware features of my computer?
More information can be found in Chapter 1 and 2. Where can I find the detailed specifications for my computer?
See http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. Where are the recovery discs?
Your computer did not come with a recovery disc. For an explanation of the alternative recovery methods offered by Lenovo, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 24. Where are the installation discs for pre-installed software?
Your computer does not come with installation discs for the pre-installed software. Installation programs for the pre-installed software on your computer can be downloaded from Lenovos consumer support Web site
(http://consumersupport.lenovo.com). If your computer is pre-installed with Windows operating system, you can also find installation programs for some pre-installed software in the Application folder on D partition of the hard disk drive. How can I contact the customer support center?
See Chapter 3. Getting help and service of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 27 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Where can I find warranty information?
For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. Where can I find the device drivers?
A compatible device driver is a requirement to ensure correct operation and performance of each component in your computer. All the device drivers for your computer model can be downloaded from Lenovos consumer support Web site. If your computer is pre-installed with Windows operating system, you can also find device drivers for the operating system in the Driver folder on D partition of the hard disk drive. Lenovos consumer support Web site contains the most updated device drivers. What can I do if the backup process fails?
If you can start the backup feature without a problem, but it fails during the backup process, please try the following steps:
1 Close other programs, then restart the backup process. 2 Check if the destination media is damaged, try to select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to the factory status?
You can use this feature when your system fails or you need to re-install your operating system. This will restore your computer back to the initial status when you first booted up your computer after receiving it from the store. If there is critical data on your current partition, back it up before you run this recovery feature. 28 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
If you do not find your problem here, see Chapter 2. The following section only describes problems that might negate the need to refer to the more comprehensive information in Chapter 2. Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. My screen goes blank while the computer is on.
If the screen is blank, make sure that:
- The AC adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.
- The computer power is on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.) If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced.
Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to the original factory contents using OneKey Rescue system. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced.
Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to exit from the screen saver or to resume from sleep or hibernation mode:
- Touch the touchpad.
- Press any key on the keyboard.
- Press the power button. 29 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Password problems I forgot my password.
If you forget your user password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password changed. If you forget your HDD password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. If you forget your administrator password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Sleep or hibernation problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on self-test (POST).
The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, or replace the battery with a fully charged one.
Make sure that:
- The battery is charged.
- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 30 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting The computer does not return from sleep mode and the computer does not work.
If the computer does not return from sleep mode, it may have entered hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the power indicator. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press any key or the power button. If your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press the power button to resume operation. Note: If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC adapter. Computer screen problems The screen is blank.
Do the following:
- If you are using the AC adapter, or using the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press to make the screen brighter.
- If the power indicator is in blinking, press the power button to resume from the sleep mode.
- If the problem persist, follow the solution in the following problem The screen is unreadable or distorted. The screen is unreadable or distorted.
Make sure that:
- The display device driver is installed correctly.
- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.
- The monitor type is correct. Incorrect characters appear on the screen.
Did you install the operating system or programs correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. 31 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the volume is turned up. Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.
-or-
Your computer operates after the battery status indi-
cator shows empty.
Make sure that:
- The Mute function is off.
- The headphone jack is not used.
- Speakers are selected as the playback device.
Discharge and recharge the battery. The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery.
The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. A hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive does not work. A startup problem The Microsoft Windows operating system does not start.
In the Boot menu in BIOS setup utility, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot Priority Order correctly.
Use the OneKey Rescue system to help solve or identify your problem. For details about OneKey Rescue system, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 24. 32 Other problems Your computer does not respond. The computer does not start from a device you want. The connected external device does not work. Chapter 5. Troubleshooting
To turn off your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC adapter.
Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network.
See the Boot menu of the BIOS setup utility. Make sure that the Boot Priority Order in the BIOS setup utility is set so that the computer starts from the device you want.
Also make sure that the device from which the computer starts is enabled. In the Boot menu in the BIOS setup utility, make sure that the device is included in the Boot Priority Order list.
Press Fn + F12 (when HotKey Switch is set to Hotkey Mode) or F12 (when HotKey Switch is set to Legacy Mode) when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up to select the device you want the computer starts from.
Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer.
When using a high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or system shut down may result. 33 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo IdeaPad OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 34 Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (March 2011) Copyright Lenovo 2011. LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights to use, reproduction and disclosure. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Lenovo IdeaPad U310/U410 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 2 V1.1_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer.
various | Host Manual-2 | Users Manual | 1.28 MiB |
U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 1 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM P/N:147500930-1.1 Printed in China Lenovo limited warranty L505-0010-02 08/2011 This Lenovo Limited Warranty consists of the following parts:
Part 1 - General Terms Part 2 - Country-specific Terms Part 3 - Warranty Service Information The terms of Part 2 replace or modify terms of Part 1 as specified for a particular country. Part 1 - General Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This Lenovo Limited Warranty applies only to Lenovo hardware products you purchased for your own use and not for resale. This Lenovo Limited Warranty is available in other languages at www.lenovo.com/warranty.
What this Warranty Covers Lenovo warrants that each Lenovo hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase as shown on your sales receipt or invoice or as may be otherwise specified by Lenovo. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are as specified in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. This warranty only applies to products in the country or region of purchase. THIS WARRANTY IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE EXTENT AND FOR SUCH DURATION AS REQUIRED BY LAW AND ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION ON DURATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 1 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 2 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty
How to Obtain Warranty Service If the product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, you may obtain warranty service by contacting Lenovo or a Lenovo approved Service Provider. A list of approved Service Providers and their telephone numbers is available at: www.lenovo.com/support/phone. Warranty service may not be available in all locations and may differ from location to location. Charges may apply outside a Service Providers normal service area. Contact a local Service Provider for information specific to your location.
Customer Responsibilities for Warranty Service Before warranty service is provided, you must take the following steps:
follow the service request procedures specified by the Service Provider
backup or secure all programs and data contained in the product
provide the Service Provider with all system keys or passwords
provide the Service Provider with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to perform service
remove all data, including confidential information, proprietary information and personal information, from the product or, if you are unable to remove any such information, modify the information to prevent its access by another party or so that it is not personal data under applicable law. The Service Provider shall not be responsible for the loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, on a product returned or accessed for warranty service
remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not covered by the warranty
ensure that the product or part is free of any legal restrictions that prevent its replacement
if you are not the owner of a product or part, obtain authorization from the owner for the Service Provider to provide warranty service 2 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 3 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty
What Your Service Provider Will Do to Correct Problems When you contact a Service Provider, you must follow the specified problem determination and resolution procedures. The Service Provider will attempt to diagnose and resolve your problem by telephone, e-mail or remote assistance. The Service Provider may direct you to download and install designated software updates. Some problems may be resolved with a replacement part that you install yourself called a Customer Replaceable Unit or CRU. If so, the Service Provider will ship the CRU to you for you to install. If your problem cannot be resolved over the telephone; through the application of software updates or the installation of a CRU, the Service Provider will arrange for service under the type of warranty service designated for the product under Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to repair your product, the Service Provider will replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to either repair or replace your product, your sole remedy under this Limited Warranty is to return the product to your place of purchase or to Lenovo for a refund of your purchase price.
Replacement Products and Parts When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovos property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. 3 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 4 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Use of Personal Contact Information If you obtain service under this warranty, you authorize Lenovo to store, use and process information about your warranty service and your contact information, including name, phone numbers, address, and e-mail address. Lenovo may use this information to perform service under this warranty. We may contact you to inquire about your satisfaction with our warranty service or to notify you about any product recalls or safety issues. In accomplishing these purposes, you authorize Lenovo to transfer your information to any country where we do business and to provide it to entities acting on our behalf. We may also disclose it where required by law. Lenovos privacy policy is available at www.lenovo.com/.
What this Warranty Does not Cover This warranty does not cover the following:
uninterrupted or error-free operation of a product
loss of, or damage to, your data by a product
any software programs, whether provided with the product or installed subsequently
failure or damage resulting from misuse, abuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, natural disasters, power surges, improper maintenance, or use not in accordance with product information materials
damage caused by a non-authorized service provider
failure of, or damage caused by, any third party products, including those that Lenovo may provide or integrate into the Lenovo product at your request
any technical or other support, such as assistance with how-to questions and those regarding product set-up and installation
products or parts with an altered identification label or from which the identification label has been removed 4 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 5 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Limitation of Liability Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Providers possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY:
1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY (INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 5 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 6 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Your Other Rights THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS ACCORDING TO THE APPLICABLE LAWS OF YOUR STATE OR JURISDICTION. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER A WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LENOVO. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS, INCLUDING RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS UNDER LAWS OR REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF CONSUMER GOODS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. 6 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 7 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty Part 2 - Country-specific Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Australia Lenovo means Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: +61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
What this Warranty Covers:
Lenovo warrants that each hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and conditions during the warranty period. If the product fails due to a covered defect during the warranty period, Lenovo will provide you a remedy under this Limited Warranty. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase specified on your sales receipt or invoice unless Lenovo informs you otherwise in writing. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are set forth below in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information. THE BENEFITS GIVEN BY THIS WARRANTY ARE IN ADDITION TO YOUR RIGHTS AND REMEDIES AT LAW, INCLUDING THOSE UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
7 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 8 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Replacement Products and Parts:
When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovos property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. Products and parts presented for repair may be replaced by refurbished products or parts of the same type rather than being repaired. Refurbished parts may be used to repair the product; and repair of the product may result in loss of data, if the product is capable of retaining user-generated data. The following is added to the same section in Part 1:
Use of Personal Contact Information:
Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal contact information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1988 by contacting Lenovo. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
Limitation of Liability:
Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. 8 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 9 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY (INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
Your Other Rights:
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS OR RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING RIGHTS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. For example, our products come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the products repaired or replaced if the products fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. 9 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 10 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty New Zealand The following is added to the same section in Part 1:
Use of Personal Information:
Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1993 by contacting Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: 61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com Bangladesh, Cambodia, India, Indonesia, Nepal, Philippines, Vietnam and Sri Lanka The following is added to Part 1:
Dispute Resolution Disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Singapore. This warranty shall be governed, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of Singapore, without regard to conflict of laws. If you acquired the product in India, disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Bangalore, India. Arbitration in Singapore shall be held in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of Singapore International Arbitration Center
(SIAC Rules) then in effect. Arbitration in India shall be held in accordance with the laws of India then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding on the parties without appeal. Any award shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. All arbitration proceedings, including all documents presented in such proceedings shall be conducted in the English language. The English language version of this warranty prevails over any other language version in such proceedings. 10 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 11 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty
European Economic Area (EEA) The following is added to Part 1:
Customers in the EEA may contact Lenovo at the following address: EMEA Service Organisation, Lenovo (International) B.V., Floor 2, Einsteinova 21, 851 01, Bratislava, Slovakia. Service under this warranty for Lenovo hardware products purchased in EEA countries may be obtained in any EEA country in which the product has been announced and made available by Lenovo. Russia The following is added to Part 1:
Product Service Life The product service life is four (4) years from the original date of purchase. 11 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 12 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty Part 3 - Warranty Service Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period Types of warranty service 3, 4 1, 3, 4 Notebook:
20191, 4941 Taiwan, Korea Singapore China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), China
(Macau S.A.R.), India, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Vietnam, Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Egypt, South Africa, Saudi Arabia, UAE, Algeria, Nigeria, Kenya, Sri Lanka Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Cyprus, Greece, Macedonia, Romania, Slovenia, Serbia Argentina, Colombia, Peru, Venezuela, Bolivia, Uruguay, Chile, Paraguay, Ecuador Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Iceland, Israel, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Switzerland, the United Kingdom Japan, Australia, New Zealand United States of America, Canada Russia, Ukraine, the Republic of Kazakhstan, Belarus, Turkmenistan, Azerbaijan, Georgia Brazil Mexico Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Norway, Spain, Sweden Poland, Turkey, Czech Republic, Hungary, Slovakia, Bulgaria 1, 4 1, 3 4 1, 5 4 1, 4 parts and labor -
1 year battery pack -
1 year parts and labor -
2 years battery pack -
1 year If required, the Service Provider will provide repair or exchange service depending on the type of warranty service specified for your product and the available service. Scheduling of service will depend upon the time of your call, parts availability, and other factors. 12 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 13 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Types of Warranty Service 1 Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) Service Under CRU Service, the Service Provider will ship CRUs to you at its cost for installation by you. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your product and are available from Lenovo at any time upon request. CRUs that are easily installed by you are called Self-service CRUs. Optional-service CRUs are CRUs that may require some technical skill and tools. Installation of Self-service CRUs is your responsibility. You may request that a Service Provider install Optional-service CRUs under one of the other types of warranty service designated for your product. An optional service offering may be available for purchase from a Service Provider or Lenovo under which Self-service CRUs would be installed for you. You may find a list of CRUs and their designation in the publication that was shipped with your product or at www.lenovo.com/CRUs. The requirement to return a defective CRU, if any, will be specified in the instructions shipped with a replacement CRU. When return is required: 1) return instructions, a prepaid return shipping label, and a container will be included with the replacement CRU; and 2) you may be charged for the replacement CRU if the Service Provider does not receive the defective CRU from you within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement CRU. 2 On-site Service Under On-Site Service, a Service Provider will either repair or exchange the product at your location. You must provide a suitable working area to allow disassembly and reassembly of the product. Some repairs may need to be completed at a service center. If so, the Service Provider will send the product to the service center at its expense. 3 Courier or Depot Service Under Courier or Depot Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center, with shipping at the expense of the Service Provider. You are responsible for disconnecting the product and packing it in a shipping container provided to you to return your product to a designated service center. A courier will pick up your product and deliver it to the designated service center. The service center will return the product to you at its expense. 13 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 14 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty 4 Customer Carry-In Service Under Customer Carry-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for collection. If you fail to collect the product, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 5 Mail-In Service Under Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center after you deliver it at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be returned to you at Lenovos risk and expense, unless the Service Provider specifies otherwise. 6 Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service Under Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for return shipping at your risk and expense. If you fail to arrange return shipment, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 7 Product Exchange Service Under Product Exchange Service, Lenovo will ship a replacement product to your location. You are responsible for its installation and verification of its operation. The replacement product becomes your property in exchange for the failed product, which becomes the property of Lenovo. You must pack the failed product in the shipping carton in which you received the replacement product and return it to Lenovo. Transportation charges, both ways, shall be at Lenovos expense. If you fail to use the carton in which the replacement product was received, you may be responsible for any damage to the failed product occurring during shipment. You may be charged for the replacement product if Lenovo does not receive the failed product within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement product. 14 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 15 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices The notices in this appendix are specific to the products with the given MT numbers. Notices that are common for most Lenovo products are included in Appendix A. Notices of the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Energy star information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if the ENERGY STAR mark is affixed, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers.
20191, 4941 By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power-management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, visit http://www.energystar.gov. Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when your computer has been inactive for a specified duration:
15 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 16 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices Table 1. ENERGY STAR power-management features Windows 7 Power plan: Energy Star
Turn off the display:
After 10 minutes
Put the computer to sleep:
After 25 minutes
Advanced power settings:
- Turn off hard disks:
After 20 minutes
- Hibernate: After 1 hour To awaken your computer from a Sleep mode, press any key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, refer to your Windows Help and Support information system. 16 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 17 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices Electronic emissions notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The following information refers to Lenovo IdeaPad U310/U410, machine type 20191, 4941.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 17 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 18 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices Responsible party:
Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Telephone: (919) 294-5900
Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
German Class B Compliance Statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:
Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/
108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. 18 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 19 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices Deutschland:
Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmittein Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (frher 89/336/EWG), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo
(Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B.
European Union Compliance Statement Class B Compliance European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-
recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. 19 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 20 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Such cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors. 20 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 21 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Specifications Model Name: Lenovo IdeaPad U510 Machine Type: 20191, 4941 Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Processor Memory Type and speed Maximum supported capacity Slots Hard disk drive Form factor Interface Display Display resolution (LCD) Maximum display resolution on external display device LCD backlight Appr. 382 mm 250 mm 21 mm Appr. 2.2 kg 15.6-inch See the system properties of your computer. You can do this as follows:
Click Start, right-click Computer;
then from the pull down menu select Properties. DDR3-1333 or DDR3-1600 8 GB SODIMM 2 2.5-inch, 9.5 mm or 2.5-inch, 7.0 mm SATA 16:9 (1,366 768 pixels) 2,048 1,536 pixels LED 21 Appendix UG x-D.fm Page 22 Friday, May 18, 2012 6:00 PM Specifications I/O Ports USB Audio Communication Video/Audio Memory card slot Battery pack Type Cells/Capacity AC adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera Combo audio jack 1 RJ-45 1 HDMI 1 2 in 1 slot 1 (MMC, SD) Li-Polymer 45Wh, 3cell/6cell 4060mah 90 - 264 V, 50 - 60 Hz AC 20 V DC 65 W 0.3 or 1.0 mega pixels 22 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 23 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Trademarks Lenovo, the Lenovo logo, IdeaPad are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 23 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 24 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM
various | OEM Guide | Users Manual | 249.51 KiB |
OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:
Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:
A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 1 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:
1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer to provide at least 1.8cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter Page 2 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency Page 3 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:
802.11a Restrictions:
- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).
- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.
- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.
- This product can be used as shown in the table below:
5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Page 4 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:
User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:
2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:
In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:
Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:
- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.
- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Page 5 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:
Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:
(ID):
CCXXxxLPyyyZz
,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.
"
"
Page 6 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide
"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."
Translation:
"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."
8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 7 of 7
various | OEM user manual | Users Manual | 249.62 KiB |
OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:
Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:
A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 1 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:
1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer to provide at least 20cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter Page 2 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency Page 3 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:
802.11a Restrictions:
- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).
- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.
- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.
- This product can be used as shown in the table below:
5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Page 4 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:
User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:
2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:
In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:
Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:
- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.
- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Page 5 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:
Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:
(ID):
CCXXxxLPyyyZz
,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.
"
"
Page 6 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I; IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide
"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."
Translation:
"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."
8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 7 of 7
various | Users Manual | Users Manual | 698.04 KiB | December 07 2012 / September 01 2013 |
Dell Latitude XT3 Setup And Features Information About Warnings WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Front And Back View Figure 1. Front View 1. microphone (optional) 2. camera (optional) 3. camera status light (optional) 4. volume control buttons 5. fingerprint reader 6. security cable slot 7. USB 2.0 connector 8. eSATA/USB 2.0 connector 9. wireless on/off switch 10. keyboard Regulatory Model:P17G Regulatory Type:P17G001 2011 04 trackstick buttons (3) touchpad 11. speakers (2) 12. smart card reader 13. 14. 15. display latch lock 16. 17. touchpad buttons (2) trackstick Figure 2. Back View 1. display latch release 2. ExpressCard slot 3. cooling vents 4. headphone (line-out)/microphone
(line-in) connector 5. USB 2.0 connector 6. Secure Digital (SD) card slot 7. 8. pen 9. pen tether slot IEEE 1394 connector 18. power button 19. Windows security button 20. screen rotate button 21. Dell Feature Enhancement Pack/
settings button 22. device status lights rotating hinge 10. power and battery status lights 11. 12. network connector 13. VGA connector 14. HDMI connector 15. power connector 16. tablet back button 17. scroll control button NOTE: Use the 3.5mm, four-conductor TRRS speaker-microphone connector plug. 2 WARNING: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your Dell computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. Quick Setup WARNING: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional best practices information, see www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. WARNING: The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors and power strips vary among countries. Using an incompatible cable or improperly connecting the cable to the power strip or electrical outlet may cause fire or equipment damage. CAUTION: When you disconnect the AC adapter cable from the computer, grasp the connector, not the cable itself, and pull firmly but gently to avoid damaging the cable. When you wrap the AC adapter cable, ensure that you follow the angle of the connector on the AC adapter to avoid damaging the cable. NOTE: Some devices may not be included if you did not order them. The docking-
station device is optional. 1. Connect the AC adapter to the AC adapter connector on the computer and to the electrical outlet. Figure 3. AC Adapter 2. Connect the network cable (optional). Figure 4. Network Connector 3 3. Connect USB devices, such as a mouse or keyboard (optional). Figure 5. USB Connector 4. Connect IEEE 1394 devices, such as a 1394 hard drive (optional). Figure 6. 1394 Connector 5. Connect to an external monitor using one of the following cables
(optional):
Figure 7. HDMI Connector Figure 8. HDMI to DVI Adapter 6. Open the computer display and press the power button to turn on the computer. 4 Figure 9. Power Button 7. To retrieve or store the pen, push pen inward until you hear a click, then release. Figure 10. Pen NOTE: It is recommended that you turn on and shut down your computer at least once before you install any cards or connect the computer to a docking device or other external device, such as a printer. Specifications NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. The following specifications are only those required by law to ship with your computer. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click Start Help and Support and select the option to view information about your computer. System Information Chipset Processor Video Video type Data bus Intel Mobile vPro QM67 chipset Intel Core i3 series Intel Core i5 series Intel Core i7 series Intel HD Graphics 3000 integrated video Video controller and memory Intel UMA up to 1692 MB shared video 5 Video NOTE: The video memory will differ depending on the operating system and computer memory. Memory Memory connector Memory capacity Memory type Minimum memory Maximum memory Smart Card Read/write capabilities two SODIMM slots 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB DDR3 1333MHz 1 GB up to 8 GB Supports ISO-7816-3 (asynchronous and synchronous Type I and II), ISO7816-12 Cards supported 1.80 V, 3 V, and 5 V Program technology supported JAVA cards 9600 BPS to 115,200 BPS level 1 certified PC/SC 6cell lithium ion (44 Whr) 9cell lithium ion (76 Whr) 302.30 g (0.66 lb) 485.69 g (1.07 lb) 265.96 mm (10.47 inches) 75.74 mm (2.98 inches) 285.99 mm (11.26 inches) 100.92 mm (3.97 inches) 13.06 mm (0.51 inch) 13.24 mm to 21.18 mm (0.52 inch to 0.83 inch) 96.84 mm (3.81 inches) 11.1 VDC Interface speed EMV level WHQL certification Battery Type (minimum) Weight Length Width Height Depth Voltage 6 Battery Temperature range:
Operating 0 C to 50 C (32 F to 122 F) Non-operating
-20 C to 65 C (-4 F to 149 F) Coin-cell battery 3 V CR2032 lithium ion AC Adapter Input voltage Input current
(maximum) Input frequency Output power Output current 100 VAC to 240 VAC 1.50 A 50 Hz to 60 Hz 65 W 90 W I rated (A) = 3.34 A, I
(A) = 3.11 A I rated (A) = 4.62 A, I(A) =
4.12 A Rated output voltage 19.50 VDC Dimensions:
Height Width Depth Temperature range:
16 mm (0.63 inch) 63 mm (2.48 inches) 88 mm (3.46 inches) Operating 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F) Non Operating
-40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F) Physical Height (with a WLED panel) 30.90 mm (1.22 inches) 323.00 mm (12.72 inches) 221.70 mm (8.73 inches) 1.98 kg (4.38 lb) (with 6-cell battery and lightweight solid state drive) Width Depth Weight (minimum) Environmental Temperature:
7 Environmental Operating Storage Relative humidity (maximum):
Operating Storage Airborne contaminant level 10 C to 35 C (50 F to 95 F)
-40 C to 65 C (-40 F to 149 F) 10% to 90% (noncondensing) 5% to 95% (noncondensing) G1 or lower as defined by ISA-S71.04 1985 Finding More Information and Resources See the safety and regulatory documents that shipped with your computer and the regulatory compliance website at www.dell.com/
regulatory_compliance for more information on:
Safety best practices Regulatory certification Ergonomics See www.dell.com for additional information on:
Warranty Terms and Conditions (U.S. only) End User License Agreement Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Dell Precision, Precision ON, ExpressCharge, Latitude, Latitude ON, OptiPlex, Vostro, and Wi-Fi Catcher are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel, Pentium, Xeon, Core, Atom, Centrino, and Celeron are registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. AMD is a registered trademark and AMD Opteron, AMD Phenom, AMD Sempron, AMD Athlon, ATI Radeon, and ATI FirePro are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft, Windows, MS-DOS, Windows Vista, the Windows Vista start button, and Office Outlook are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Blu-ray Disc is a trademark owned by the Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA) and licensed for use on discs and players. The Bluetooth word mark is a registered trademark and owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such mark by Dell 8 Inc. is under license. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance, Inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products, Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. 9 FCC Radiation Exposure Statement WARNING: The radiated output power of the Dell Wireless WLAN Card devices is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Dell Wireless WLAN Card devices should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the printer. To determine the location of the antenna within your printer, check the information posted on the general Dell support site at http://support.dell.com. This device has also been evaluated for and shown compliant with the FCC RF exposure limits under portable exposure conditions (antennas are within 20 cm of a person's body) when installed in certain specific OEM configurations. Details of the authorized configurations can be found at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid/help.html by entering the FCC ID number on the device. Interference Statement This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) This device may not cause harmful interference. 2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Notice: The FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell Inc. could void your authority to operate this equipment. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference with radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient the receiving antenna. Relocate the system with respect to the receiver. Move the system away from the receiver. Plug the system into a different outlet so that the system and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a representative of Dell Inc. or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. NOTE: This Dell Wireless WLAN Card must be installed and used in strict accordance with the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. Modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate the equipment. instructions as described the manufacturer's in This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The Dell Wireless WLAN Card products are designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) and to comply with the following standards:
IEEE 802.11a Standard on 5 GHz Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11b-1999 Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) certification, as defined by the WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance) Safety The Dell Wireless WLAN Card, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Dell Wireless WLAN Card wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Dell Wireless WLAN Card wireless devices may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:
Using the Dell Wireless WLAN Card equipment on board airplanes, or Using the Dell Wireless WLAN Card equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Dell Wireless WLAN Card wireless device before you turn it on. Explosive Device Proximity Warning:
Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Use on Aircraft Caution:
Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Regulatory Information The Dell Wireless WLAN Card wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Dell Inc. is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Dell Wireless WLAN Card kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Dell Inc. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Dell Inc. and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. Radio Approvals It is important to ensure that you only use your radio device in countries where the device is approved for use. To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device or listed on the radio approval list posted on the general Dell support site at http://support.dell.com.
various | Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.45 MiB | February 04 2012 |
Lenovo IdeaPad Y480/ Y580 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 2 V1.0_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations used in this manual are for Lenovo IdeaPad Y580 unless otherwise stated. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (February 2012) Copyright Lenovo 2012. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer .......................................................1 Top view .........................................................1 Left-side view ................................................4 Right-side view..............................................5 Front view ......................................................6 Bottom view ...................................................7 Chapter 2. Learning the basics ...................9 First use...........................................................9 Using AC adapter and battery ..................11 Using the touchpad.....................................12 Using the keyboard.....................................13 Connecting external devices......................16 Special keys and buttons............................19 System status indicators.............................21 Securing your computer.............................22 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet ..... 23 Wired connection ........................................ 23 Wireless connection .................................... 24 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system ......... 25 OneKey Rescue system .............................. 25 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting...................... 27 Frequently asked questions....................... 27 Troubleshooting .......................................... 29 Appendix. CRU instructions..................... 33 Replacing the battery.................................. 33 Replacing the hard disk drive................... 34 Replacing memory...................................... 37 Removing the optical drive ....................... 40 Trademarks ................................................ 41 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Y480 f g h i ab b c d e j Note: The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product.
Attention:
Do NOT open the display panel beyond 130 degrees. When closing the display panel, be careful NOT to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer
Y580 f g h i ab b c d e j k Integrated camera Use the camera for video communication. Built-in microphone The built-in microphone (with noise reduction) can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or simple audio recordings. Wireless module antennas The built-in antennas ensure optimal reception of wireless radio. Computer display The LCD display provides brilliant visual output. JBL speakers The stereo speakers provide rich and powerful sound. a b c d e 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer f g Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. OneKey Rescue system button Press this button to start OneKey Rescue system when the computer is powered off. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 25. h OneKey Theater button Touch this button to select a preferred scenario mode. Note: For details, see OneKey Theater button on page 20. i Volume button Mute/Unmute. j Touchpad The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Note: For details, see Using the touchpad on page 12. k Numeric keypad
(Y580) For details, see Using the keyboard on page 13. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b c ed f a Kensington slot Attach a security lock (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Attaching a security lock (not supplied) on page 22. b Fan louvers Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that none of the fan louvers are blocked or else overheating of the computer may occur. VGA port RJ-45 port Connects to external display devices. This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 23. HDMI port USB port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. Connects to USB devices. Notes:
The blue port supports USB 3.0. For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 17. c d e f 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Y480
Y580 a b c e c f dcba e c f a Headphone jack Connects to external headphones.
Attention:
Listening to music at high volume over extended periods of time may damage your hearing. b c Microphone jack Connects to external microphones. USB port Connects to USB devices. Notes:
The blue port supports USB 3.0. For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 17. d TV-in jack
(on select models) Attach an external TV antenna here. e Optical drive Reads/Burns optical disks. f AC power adapter jack Connect the AC adapter here. Note: For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 11. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Front view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b a System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 21. b Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 16. 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Y480 a b c d 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer
Y580 a b c d Battery latch - spring loaded The spring-loaded battery latch keeps the battery pack secured in place. Battery pack For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 11. Battery latch - manual The manual battery latch is used to keep the battery pack secured in place. Hard disk drive
(HDD) / Memory / Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment a b c d 8 Chapter 2. Learning the basics First use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Reading the manuals Read the supplied manuals before using your computer.
Connecting to the power The supplied battery pack is not fully charged at purchase. To charge the battery and begin using your computer, insert the battery pack and connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is automatically charged while the computer is running on AC power. Installing the battery pack Refer to the supplied Setup Poster to install the battery pack. Connecting the computer to an electrical outlet 1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC power adapter jack of the computer firmly. 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
Turning on the computer Press the power button to turn on the computer.
Configuring the operating system You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below.
Accepting the end user license agreement
Configuring the Internet connection
Registering the operating system
Creating a user account 9 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Putting your computer into sleep state or shutting it down When you finish working with your computer, you can put it into sleep state or shut it down. Putting your computer into sleep state If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer into sleep state. When the computer is in sleep state, you can quickly wake it to resume use, and bypass the startup process. To put the computer into sleep state, do one of the following.
Click
Press Fn + F1. and select Sleep from the Start menu. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is in sleep state) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following.
Press the power button.
Press any key on the keyboard. Shutting down your computer If you are not going to use your computer for a day or two, shut it down. To shut down your computer, click and select Shut down from the Start menu. 10 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using AC adapter and battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Checking battery status You can determine the percentage of battery power remaining by checking the battery icon in the notification area. Note: As each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:
The amount of energy stored in the battery when you commence work. The way you use your computer: for example, how often you access the hard disk drive and how bright you make the computer display.
Charging the battery When you find that the battery power is low, you need to charge the battery or replace it with a fully charged one. You need to charge the battery in any of the following situations:
When you purchase a new battery
If the battery status indicator starts blinking
If the battery has not been used for a long time Notes:
You are advised to insert the battery pack when using your computer to prevent small particles from
entering the inside of your computer. To increase the life of the battery pack, the computer does not start recharging the battery immediately after it drops from fully charged.
Charge the battery at a temperature between 50 F and 86 F (10 C-30 C).
Full charge or discharge is not required.
Removing the battery pack If you are not going to use the computer for an extended period of time, or if you need to send your computer to Lenovo for service, etc. remove the battery pack from the computer. Before removing the battery pack, make sure the computer has been shut down.
Handling the battery If the rechargeable battery pack is replaced with an incorrect type, there may be danger of an explosion. The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury and detriment to the environment, pay attention to the following points:
Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo.
Keep the battery pack away from fire.
Do not expose the battery pack to water or rain.
Do not attempt to disassemble the battery pack.
Do not short-circuit the battery pack.
Keep the battery pack away from children.
Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your companys safety standards. 11 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the touchpad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b a Touchpad b Touchpad button To move the cursor on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the cursor to move. The function of the left/right side corresponds to that of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Notes:
You can enable/disable the touchpad using Fn + F6.
When the touchpad indicator is lit, the touchpad is disabled. 12 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the keyboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Your computer has a numeric keypad and function keys incorporated in its standard keyboard.
Numeric keypad Y480 The keyboard has keys that, when enabled, work as a 10-key numeric keypad. To enable or disable the numeric keypad, press Fn + F8. Y580 The keyboard has a separate numeric keypad. To enable or disable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key. Note: The Num lock indicator will light on if the numeric keypad is enabled. 13 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Function key combinations Through the use of the function keys, you can change operational features instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn
; then press one of the function keys a b
. b a 14 Chapter 2. Learning the basics The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + Esc:
Turn on/off the integrated camera. Fn + F1:
Fn + F2:
Fn + F3:
Fn + F4:
Fn + F5:
Fn + F6:
Enter sleep mode. Turn on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Open the interface for the display device switch to select this notebook or an external display. Open the interface for display resolution settings. Open the interface for integrated wireless devices settings (on/off). Enable/Disable the touchpad. Fn + F8 (Y480):
Enable/Disable the numeric keypad. Fn + F9:
Fn + F10:
Fn + F11:
Fn + F12:
Start/Pause playback of Windows Media Player. Stop playback of Windows Media Player. Skip to the previous track. Skip to the next track. Fn + Insert (Y580):
Fn + PgUp (Y480):
Enable/Disable the scroll lock. Fn + PrtSc:
Fn + Home:
Fn + End:
Activate the system request. Activate the pause function. Activate the break function. Fn + PgDn (Y480):
Activate the insert function. Fn + / :
Fn + / :
Fn + Space
(on select models):
Increase/Decrease display brightness. Increase/Decrease sound volume. Enable/Disable the keyboard backlight. 15 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting external devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Your computer has a wide range of built-in features and connection capabilities.
Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:
Secure Digital (SD) card
Secure Digital PRO (SD PRO) card
MultiMediaCard (MMC)
Memory Stick (MS)
Memory Stick PRO (MS PRO)
xD-Picture (xD) card Notes:
Insert ONLY one card in the slot at a time. This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it via Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 16 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Connecting USB devices You can connect a USB device to your computer by inserting its USB plug (Type A) into the USB port on your computer. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver is installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after connecting it, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data by that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area of Windows to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 17 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Connecting a Bluetooth device If your computer has an integrated Bluetooth adapter card, it can connect to and transfer data wirelessly to other Bluetooth enabled devices, such as notebook computers, PDAs and cell phones. You can transfer data between these devices without cables and up to 10 meters range in open space. Note: The actual maximum range may vary due to interference and transmission barriers. To get the best possible connection speed, place the device as near your computer as possible. Enabling Bluetooth communications on your computer Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Notes:
When you do not need to use the Bluetooth function, turn it off to save battery power.
You need to pair the Bluetooth enabled device with your computer before you can transfer data between them. Read the documentation supplied with the Bluetooth enabled device for details on how to pair the device with your computer. 18 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Special keys and buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
b c a
OneKey Rescue system button a
When the computer is powered-off, press this button to start Lenovo OneKey Rescue system.
In Windows operating system, press this button to start Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 25. 19 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
OneKey Theater button b Lenovo OneKey Theater provides three scenario modes for using your computer in different ways: normal mode, movie mode, music mode, picture mode, and intelligent mode. These modes are preset enhancements by Lenovo to improve visual and aural experiences via your computer in different usage scenarios. You can manually choose between normal, movie and intelligent mode. Picture or music mode is automatically selected if your computer is in intelligent mode. To manually select a desired mode:
1 Press and release the OneKey Theater button to display the on-screen menu. 2 Keep pressing and releasing the button until the icon of your desired mode is highlighted. The computer switches to the selected mode after 2 seconds. Normal mode The default mode. Movie mode Provides enhanced visual and audio output. Intelligent mode Lenovo OneKey Theater switches intelligently between movie mode, music mode, and picture mode according to the application you are using. Notes:
You can enable or disable the OneKey Theater feature via the Start menu.
Some applications may not be compatible with intelligent mode.
Volume button c Mute/Unmute 20 Chapter 2. Learning the basics System status indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
These indicators inform you of the computer status. a b c d e a b c d e Touchpad indicator Battery status indicator Power status indicator Caps lock indicator Num lock indicator 21 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Securing your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This section provides information about how to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.
Attaching a security lock (not supplied) You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Refer to the Right-side view on page 5 for the location of the Kensington slot. Notes:
You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security Before purchasing any security product, verify that it is compatible with this type of security keyhole. features. Lenovo offers no comment judgement or warranty regarding the function, quality or performance of locking devices and security features.
Using VeriFace VeriFace is a face recognition software which takes a digital snapshot, extracts key features of your face, and creates a digital map that becomes the systems password. If you want to activate VeriFace for the first time, click the VeriFace icon on the desktop to register your facial image. Notes:
You can determine whether to use this function when you log on the system. The face registration and verification works best in an environment with steady and even light. For more details on VeriFace, see the software help.
Using passwords Using passwords helps prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a password and enable it, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. The computer cannot be used unless you enter the correct password. Note: This password can be from one to seven alphanumeric characters in any combination. For details about how to set the password, see the Help to the right of the screen in BIOS setup utility. Note: To enter BIOS setup utility, press F2 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up. 22 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet As a global network, the Internet connects computers worldwide, providing services such as e-mailing, information searching, electronic commerce, Web browsing and entertainment. You can connect the computer to the Internet in the following ways:
Wired connection: use physical wiring to connect. Wireless network technology: connect without wiring. Wired connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wired connections are a reliable and safe way to connect the computer to the Internet. Cable DSL Cable Internet services use a cable modem connected to the residential cable TV line. DSL is a family of related technologies that bring high-speed network access to homes and small businesses over ordinary telephone lines.
Hardware connection Cable DSL TV cable Telephone line Splitter *
Splitter *
Cable modem *
DSL modem *
* Not supplied. Note: The above diagrams are for reference only. Actual connection method may vary.
Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer.
23 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Wireless connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wireless connections provide mobile access to the Internet, allowing you to stay online anywhere the wireless signal covers. Divided by the signal scales, wireless connection to the Internet can be built based on the following standards. Wi-Fi WiMAX Wi-Fi networks cover a small physical area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings. An access point is necessary for the connection. WiMAX networks connect several Wireless LAN systems to cover a metropolitan area, providing high-speed broadband access without the need for cables. Note: Your computer may not support all wireless connection methods.
Using Wi-Fi/WiMAX Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless communications, do the following:
Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Hardware connection Access point *
Wi-Fi/WiMAX network
* Not supplied Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and search Windows Help and Support Center for details on how to configure your computer. 24 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system OneKey Rescue system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Introduction The Lenovo OneKey Rescue system is an easy-to-use application that can be used to back up the data on your system partition (C drive) for easy restore when required. You can run Lenovo OneKey Recovery under the Windows operating system, and the OneKey Rescue system without starting the Windows operating system.
Attention:
In order to utilize the features of the OneKey Rescue system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and OneKey Rescue system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons and is the reason the available disk space is less than it claims. The exact available hard disk space depends on the file size of the mirror image file (based on the size of operating system and preinstalled software).
Using Lenovo OneKey Recovery (within Windows operating system) In Windows operating system, double click the OneKey Recovery system Icon on the desktop to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Within the program, you can back up the system partition on the hard disk drive, other storage devices, or by creating recovery discs. Notes:
The backup process and creation of recovery discs may take some time, connect the AC adapter and battery pack to your computer.
After the recovery discs are burned, please number them so that you can use them in the correct order.
Computers without an integrated optical drive support the creation of recovery discs; however an appropriate external optical drive is needed to physically create the recovery discs. For more instructions, see the Help file of Lenovo OneKey Recovery.
Using Lenovo OneKey Rescue system (without Windows operating system) In the event that the operating system cannot be loaded, follow the steps below to access OneKey Rescue system.
Shut down your computer.
Press the key to launch OneKey Rescue system. Within the program, you can choose to restore your system partition to the original factory status, or to a previously generated backup. Note: The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any critical data before using the recovery feature. 25 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system
Creating a recovery disc(s) Your computer does not ship with a recovery disc. You can use Lenovo OneKey Recovery system to create a recovery disc(s), which can be used to start and restore your computer in case of a system failure. To create a recovery disc(s):
Insert a recordable disc into the optical drive on your computer. Note: If your computer does not come with an integrated optical drive or if the integrated optical drive does not support disc creating, connect an appropriate external optical drive to your computer.
In Windows, press the OneKey Rescue system button to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery system.
On the main screen, click Create Recovery Disc.
Choose the type of recovery disc(s). You can create three types of recovery disc(s): recovery disc(s) with existing backup image, recovery disc(s) from the current system partition, and factory default recovery disc(s). Select the type of recovery disc you want to create and follow the on-screen instructions.
Insert additional recordable disc(s) when prompted. Notes:
The estimated number of discs needed will be displayed before the process of creating the recovery disc(s) begins. To minimize the number of discs needed, use recordable DVDs as the media. Also make sure your optical drive is compatible with the disc intended for use.
After recovery disc creation, number the discs appropriately for use in their correct order. The first disc created will be used to start the computer in the case of a system failure. 26 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This section lists frequently asked questions and tells where you can find detailed answers. For details about each publication included in the package with your computer, see Lenovo IdeaPad Y480/Y580 Setup Poster. What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?
See Chapter 1. Important safety information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. How can I prevent problems with my computer?
See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. What are the main hardware features of my computer?
More information can be found in Chapter 1 and 2. Where can I find the detailed specifications for my computer?
See http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. I need to upgrade a device or I need to replace one of the following: the hard disk drive, memory, or the keyboard. See Appendix. CRU instructions on page 33 of this guide. Where are the recovery discs?
Your computer did not come with a recovery disc. For an explanation of the alternative recovery methods offered by Lenovo, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 25. How can I contact the customer support center?
See " Chapter 3. Getting help and service" of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Where can I find warranty information?
For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. How can I install the device drivers?
A compatible device driver is a requirement to ensure correct operation and performance of each component in your computer. If your computer is pre-installed with an operating system, Lenovo provides all drivers that you need in your hard disk. What can I do if the backup process fails?
If you can start the backup feature without a problem, but it fails during the backup process, please try the following steps:
1 Close other applications, then restart the backup process. 2 Check if the destination media is damaged, try to select another path and then try again. 27 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting When do I need to restore the system to the factory status?
You can use this feature when your system fails or you need to re-install your operating system. This will restore your computer back to the initial status when you first booted up your computer after receiving it from the store. If there is critical data on your current partition, back it up before you run this recovery feature. 28 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
If you do not find your problem here, see Chapter 2. The following section only describes problems that might negate the need to refer to the more comprehensive information in Chapter 2. Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen.
If the screen is blank, make sure that:
- The battery is installed correctly.
- The AC adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.
- The computer power is on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.)
- The memory is installed correctly. If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. My screen goes blank while the computer is on. A Password problem I forgot my password. Keyboard problems A number appears when you enter a letter (Y480).
Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to the original factory contents using OneKey Recovery. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced.
Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to exit from the screen saver or to resume from sleep or hibernation mode:
- Touch the touchpad.
- Press any key on the keyboard.
- Press the power button. Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the LCD screen has been turned off.
If you forget your user password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password changed. If you forget your HDD password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. If you forget your supervisor password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. The numeric lock function is on. To disable it, press Fn + F8. 29 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Sleep or hibernation problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on self-test
(POST).
The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, or replace the battery with a fully charged one.
Make sure that:
- The battery is charged.
- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. The computer does not return from sleep mode and the computer does not work.
If the computer does not return from sleep mode, it may have entered hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the power indicator. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press any key or the power button. If your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press the power button to resume operation. Note: If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC adapter and the battery. Computer screen problems The screen is blank.
Do the following:
- If you are using the AC adapter, or using the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press Fn + to make the screen brighter.
- If the power indicator is in blinking, press the power button to resume from the sleep mode.
- If the problem persist, follow the solution in the following problem The screen is unreadable or distorted.
- Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the LCD screen has been turned off. The screen is unreadable or distorted.
Make sure that:
- The display device driver is installed correctly.
- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.
- The monitor type is correct. Incorrect characters appear on the screen.
Did you install the operating system or application program correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the volume is turned up.
Make sure that:
- The Mute function is off.
- The headphone jack is not used.
- Speakers are selected as the playback device. 30 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.
-or-
Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. The operating time for a fully charged battery is short. The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery. The battery does not charge. A hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive does not work. A startup problem
Discharge and recharge the battery.
For details, see Handling the battery in Chapter 2. The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. For details, see Handling the battery in Chapter 2. In the Boot menu in BIOS setup utility, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot Device Priority correctly. The Microsoft Windows operating system does not start.
Use the OneKey Rescue system to help solve or identify your problem. For details about OneKey Rescue system, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 25. OneKey Rescue system problems Backup cannot be made.
You are not currently using a Windows operating system.
There is not enough space to store the backed up data. You will need to free more hard disk space on your system partition (C drive). Fail to restore system partition to factory default.
The system partition, such as the partition size or the drive capacity of C, has been modified. 31 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Other problems Your computer does not respond.
To turn off your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC adapter and the battery.
Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. The computer does not start from a device you want.
See the Boot menu of the BIOS setup utility. Make sure that the Boot Device Priority in the BIOS setup utility is set so that the computer starts from the device you want.
Also make sure that the device from which the computer starts is
enabled. In the Boot menu in the BIOS setup utility, make sure that the device is included in the Boot Device Priority list. Press F12 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up to select the device you want the computer starts from. The connected external device does not work.
Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer.
When using a high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or system shut down may result. For more technical support, please visit consumer product website http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. 32 Appendix. CRU instructions Notes:
The illustrations used in this chapter are of the Lenovo IdeaPad Y580, unless otherwise stated. The following steps about upgrading and replacing devices are the same for the Y480 and Y580. Replacing the battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Note: Use only the battery provided by Lenovo. Any other battery could ignite or explode. To replace the battery, do the following:
1 Turn off the computer, or enter hibernation mode. Disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3 Unlock the manual battery latch
. Holding the spring-loaded battery latch in the
, remove the battery pack in the direction shown by the arrow a c
. unlocked position b a c b 4 Install a fully charged battery. 5 Slide the manual battery latch to the locked position. 6 Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. 33 Appendix. CRU instructions Replacing the hard disk drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
You can increase the storage capacity of your computer by replacing the hard disk drive with one of greater capacity. You can purchase a new hard disk drive from your reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Notes:
Replace the hard disk drive only if you upgrade it or have it repaired. The connectors and bay of the hard disk drive were not designed for frequent changes, or drive swapping. The preinstalled software are not included on an optional hard disk drive.
Handling a hard disk drive
Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the drive on a material, such as soft cloth, that absorbs the physical shock.
Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive.
Do not touch the connector. The drive is very sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of data on the hard disk. Before removing the hard disk drive, make a backup copy of all the information on the hard disk, and then turn the computer off. Never remove the drive while the system is operating, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. 34 Appendix. CRU instructions To replace the hard disk drive, do the following:
1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display, and then turn the computer over. 3 Remove the battery pack. 4 Remove the Hard disk drive (HDD)/Memory/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. a. Loosen the screws that secure the compartment cover b. Remove the compartment cover
. b a b 5 Remove the frame fixing screws c
. c a
. c 35 Appendix. CRU instructions 6 Take out the hard disk drive secured in a metal frame d
. d 7 Remove the screws and detach the metal frame from the hard disk drive. 8 Attach the metal frame to a new hard disk drive and tighten the screws. 9 Put the hard disk drive gently into the hard disk drive bay with the tab facing upwards and the connectors facing each other; then push it firmly into space. 0 Reinstall the frame fixing screws. A Reinstall the compartment cover and tighten the screws. B Reinstall the battery pack. C Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. 36 Appendix. CRU instructions Replacing memory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a double-data-rate three synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3 SDRAM)-available as an option-in the memory slot of your computer. DDR3 SDRAMs are available in various capacities. Note: Use only the memory types supported by your computer. If you incorrectly install optional memory, or install an unsupported memory type, a warning beep will sound when you try to start the computer. To install a DDR3 SDRAM, do the following:
1 Touch a metal table or a grounded metal object to reduce any static electricity in your body, which could damage the DDR3 SDRAM. Do not touch the contact edge of the DDR3 SDRAM. 2 Turn off the computer. Disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 3 Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 4 Remove the battery pack. 5 Remove the Hard disk drive (HDD)/Memory/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. a. Loosen the screws that secure the compartment cover b. Remove the compartment cover
. b a b a
. 37 Appendix. CRU instructions 6 If two DDR3 SDRAMs are already installed in the memory slot, remove one of them to make room for the new one by pressing out on the latches on both edges of the socket at the same time. Be sure to save the old DDR3 SDRAM for future use. a a b 7 Align the notch of the DDR3 SDRAM with the protrusion of the socket and gently insert the DDR3 SDRAM into the socket at a 30-45 angle. 8 Push the DDR3 SDRAM inward toward the socket until the latches on both edges of the socket are pushed into the closed position. b a 9 Reinstall the compartment cover and tighten the screws. 0 Reinstall the battery pack. A Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. Note: If only one DDR3 SDRAM is used on the computer you are servicing, the card must be installed in SLOT-0 (
: lower slot), but not in SLOT-1 (
: upper slot). 38 Appendix. CRU instructions To make sure that the DDR3 SDRAM is installed correctly, do as follows:
1 Turn the computer on. 2 Hold F2 during startup. The BIOS setup utility screen opens. The System Memory item shows the total amount of memory installed in your computer. 39 Appendix. CRU instructions Removing the optical drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
To remove the optical drive, do the following:
1 Remove the Hard disk drive (HDD)/Memory/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. 2 Remove the screw shown in the illustration 3 Gently pull the optical drive out
. b b a
. a The following table provides a list of CRUs (Customer Replaceable Units) for your computer, and informs you of where to find replacement instructions. Setup Poster User Guide AC adapter Power cord for AC adapter Battery Bottom access doors Hard disk drive Memory Optical drive O O O O O O O O 40 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo IdeaPad OneKey VeriFace Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. NVIDIA and Optimus are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the United States and other countries. AMD and PowerXpress are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. Premium Surround Sound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS Premium Surround Sound provides the ultimate audio experience for music, movies and games on the PC. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 41 Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations used in this manual are for Lenovo Y570 unless otherwise stated. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (December 2010) Copyright Lenovo 2010. LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights to use, reproduction and disclosure. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. IdeaPad Y480/ Y580 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 2 V1.0_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer.
various | Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.94 MiB | February 04 2012 |
Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 1 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM P/N:#########
Printed in China Lenovo limited warranty L505-0010-02 08/2011 This Lenovo Limited Warranty consists of the following parts:
Part 1 - General Terms Part 2 - Country-specific Terms Part 3 - Warranty Service Information The terms of Part 2 replace or modify terms of Part 1 as specified for a particular country. Part 1 - General Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This Lenovo Limited Warranty applies only to Lenovo hardware products you purchased for your own use and not for resale. This Lenovo Limited Warranty is available in other languages at www.lenovo.com/warranty.
What this Warranty Covers Lenovo warrants that each Lenovo hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase as shown on your sales receipt or invoice or as may be otherwise specified by Lenovo. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are as specified in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. This warranty only applies to products in the country or region of purchase. THIS WARRANTY IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE EXTENT AND FOR SUCH DURATION AS REQUIRED BY LAW AND ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION ON DURATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
How to Obtain Warranty Service If the product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, you may obtain warranty service by contacting Lenovo or a Lenovo approved Service Provider. A list of approved Service Providers and their telephone numbers is available at: www.lenovo.com/support/phone. Warranty service may not be available in all locations and may differ from location to location. Charges may apply outside a Service Provider's normal service area. Contact a local Service Provider for information specific to your location. 1 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 2 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Customer Responsibilities for Warranty Service Before warranty service is provided, you must take the following steps:
follow the service request procedures specified by the Service Provider
backup or secure all programs and data contained in the product
provide the Service Provider with all system keys or passwords
provide the Service Provider with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to perform service
remove all data, including confidential information, proprietary information and personal information, from the product or, if you are unable to remove any such information, modify the information to prevent its access by another party or so that it is not personal data under applicable law. The Service Provider shall not be responsible for the loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, on a product returned or accessed for warranty service
remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not covered by the warranty
ensure that the product or part is free of any legal restrictions that prevent its replacement
if you are not the owner of a product or part, obtain authorization from the owner for the Service Provider to provide warranty service
What Your Service Provider Will Do to Correct Problems When you contact a Service Provider, you must follow the specified problem determination and resolution procedures. The Service Provider will attempt to diagnose and resolve your problem by telephone, e-mail or remote assistance. The Service Provider may direct you to download and install designated software updates. Some problems may be resolved with a replacement part that you install yourself called a Customer Replaceable Unit or CRU. If so, the Service Provider will ship the CRU to you for you to install. If your problem cannot be resolved over the telephone; through the application of software updates or the installation of a CRU, the Service Provider will arrange for service under the type of warranty service designated for the product under Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to repair your product, the Service Provider will replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to either repair or replace your product, your sole remedy under this Limited Warranty is to return the product to your place of purchase or to Lenovo for a refund of your purchase price. 2 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 3 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Replacement Products and Parts When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovos property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product.
Use of Personal Contact Information If you obtain service under this warranty, you authorize Lenovo to store, use and process information about your warranty service and your contact information, including name, phone numbers, address, and e-mail address. Lenovo may use this information to perform service under this warranty. We may contact you to inquire about your satisfaction with our warranty service or to notify you about any product recalls or safety issues. In accomplishing these purposes, you authorize Lenovo to transfer your information to any country where we do business and to provide it to entities acting on our behalf. We may also disclose it where required by law. Lenovos privacy policy is available at www.lenovo.com/.
What this Warranty Does not Cover This warranty does not cover the following:
uninterrupted or error-free operation of a product
loss of, or damage to, your data by a product
any software programs, whether provided with the product or installed subsequently
failure or damage resulting from misuse, abuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, natural disasters, power surges, improper maintenance, or use not in accordance with product information materials
damage caused by a non-authorized service provider
failure of, or damage caused by, any third party products, including those that Lenovo may provide or integrate into the Lenovo product at your request
any technical or other support, such as assistance with how-to questions and those regarding product set-up and installation
products or parts with an altered identification label or from which the identification label has been removed 3 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 4 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Limitation of Liability Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Providers possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY
(INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Your Other Rights THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS ACCORDING TO THE APPLICABLE LAWS OF YOUR STATE OR JURISDICTION. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER A WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LENOVO. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS, INCLUDING RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS UNDER LAWS OR REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF CONSUMER GOODS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. 4 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 5 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty Part 2 - Country-specific Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Australia Lenovo means Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address:
Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: +61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
What this Warranty Covers:
Lenovo warrants that each hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and conditions during the warranty period. If the product fails due to a covered defect during the warranty period, Lenovo will provide you a remedy under this Limited Warranty. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase specified on your sales receipt or invoice unless Lenovo informs you otherwise in writing. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are set forth below in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information. THE BENEFITS GIVEN BY THIS WARRANTY ARE IN ADDITION TO YOUR RIGHTS AND REMEDIES AT LAW, INCLUDING THOSE UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
Replacement Products and Parts:
When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovo's property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. Products and parts presented for repair may be replaced by refurbished products or parts of the same type rather than being repaired. Refurbished parts may be used to repair the product; and repair of the product may result in loss of data, if the product is capable of retaining user-generated data. The following is added to the same section in Part 1:
Use of Personal Contact Information:
Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal contact information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1988 by contacting Lenovo. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
5 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 6 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Limitation of Liability:
Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY
(INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
Your Other Rights:
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS OR RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING RIGHTS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. For example, our products come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the products repaired or replaced if the products fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. New Zealand The following is added to the same section in Part 1:
6 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 7 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Use of Personal Information:
Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1993 by contacting Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: 61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com Bangladesh, Cambodia, India, Indonesia, Nepal, Philippines, Vietnam and Sri Lanka The following is added to Part 1:
Dispute Resolution Disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Singapore. This warranty shall be governed, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of Singapore, without regard to conflict of laws. If you acquired the product in India, disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Bangalore, India. Arbitration in Singapore shall be held in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of Singapore International Arbitration Center (SIAC Rules) then in effect. Arbitration in India shall be held in accordance with the laws of India then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding on the parties without appeal. Any award shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. All arbitration proceedings, including all documents presented in such proceedings shall be conducted in the English language. The English language version of this warranty prevails over any other language version in such proceedings.
European Economic Area (EEA) The following is added to Part 1:
Customers in the EEA may contact Lenovo at the following address: EMEA Service Organisation, Lenovo (International) B.V., Floor 2, Einsteinova 21, 851 01, Bratislava, Slovakia. Service under this warranty for Lenovo hardware products purchased in EEA countries may be obtained in any EEA country in which the product has been announced and made available by Lenovo. Russia The following is added to Part 1:
Product Service Life The product service life is four (4) years from the original date of purchase. 7 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 8 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty Part 3 - Warranty Service Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period Types of warranty service 3, 4 1, 3, 4 Notebook:
20131, 2093 20132, 2099 Taiwan, Korea Singapore China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), China
(Macau S.A.R.), India, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Vietnam, Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Egypt, South Africa, Saudi Arabia, UAE, Algeria, Nigeria, Kenya, Sri Lanka Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Cyprus, Greece, Macedonia, Romania, Slovenia, Serbia Argentina, Colombia, Peru, Venezuela, Bolivia, Uruguay, Chile, Paraguay, Ecuador Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Estonia, France, Finland, Germany, Iceland, Israel, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, the United Kingdom Japan, Australia, New Zealand United States of America, Canada Brazil Mexico Russia, Ukraine, the Republic of Kazakhstan, Belarus, Turkmenistan, Azerbaijan, Georgia Poland, Turkey, Czech Republic, Hungary, Slovakia, Bulgaria 1, 4 1, 3 4 1, 5 4 1, 4 parts and labor -
1 year battery pack -
1 year parts and labor -
2 years battery pack -
1 year If required, the Service Provider will provide repair or exchange service depending on the type of warranty service specified for your product and the available service. Scheduling of service will depend upon the time of your call, parts availability, and other factors. 8 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 9 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty
Types of Warranty Service 1 Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) Service Under CRU Service, the Service Provider will ship CRUs to you at its cost for installation by you. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your product and are available from Lenovo at any time upon request. CRUs that are easily installed by you are called Self-
service CRUs. Optional-service CRUs are CRUs that may require some technical skill and tools. Installation of Self-service CRUs is your responsibility. You may request that a Service Provider install Optional-service CRUs under one of the other types of warranty service designated for your product. An optional service offering may be available for purchase from a Service Provider or Lenovo under which Self-service CRUs would be installed for you. You may find a list of CRUs and their designation in the publication that was shipped with your product or at www.lenovo.com/CRUs. The requirement to return a defective CRU, if any, will be specified in the instructions shipped with a replacement CRU. When return is required: 1) return instructions, a prepaid return shipping label, and a container will be included with the replacement CRU; and 2) you may be charged for the replacement CRU if the Service Provider does not receive the defective CRU from you within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement CRU. 2 On-site Service Under On-Site Service, a Service Provider will either repair or exchange the product at your location. You must provide a suitable working area to allow disassembly and reassembly of the product. Some repairs may need to be completed at a service center. If so, the Service Provider will send the product to the service center at its expense. 3 Courier or Depot Service Under Courier or Depot Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center, with shipping at the expense of the Service Provider. You are responsible for disconnecting the product and packing it in a shipping container provided to you to return your product to a designated service center. A courier will pick up your product and deliver it to the designated service center. The service center will return the product to you at its expense. 4 Customer Carry-In Service Under Customer Carry-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for collection. If you fail to collect the product, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 5 Mail-In Service Under Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center after you deliver it at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be returned to you at Lenovo's risk and expense, unless the Service Provider specifies otherwise. 6 Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service Under Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for return shipping at your risk and 9 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 10 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty expense. If you fail to arrange return shipment, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 7 Product Exchange Service Under Product Exchange Service, Lenovo will ship a replacement product to your location. You are responsible for its installation and verification of its operation. The replacement product becomes your property in exchange for the failed product, which becomes the property of Lenovo. You must pack the failed product in the shipping carton in which you received the replacement product and return it to Lenovo. Transportation charges, both ways, shall be at Lenovo's expense. If you fail to use the carton in which the replacement product was received, you may be responsible for any damage to the failed product occurring during shipment. You may be charged for the replacement product if Lenovo does not receive the failed product within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement product. 10 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 11 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Product specific Notices The notices in this appendix are specific to the product with the given MT number. Notices that are common for most Lenovo products are included in Appendix A. Notices of the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Energy star information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if the ENERGY STAR mark is affixed, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers.
20131, 2093
20132, 2099 By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power-management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, visit http://www.energystar.gov. Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when your computer has been inactive for a specified duration:
11 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 12 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Product specific Notices Table 1. ENERGY STAR power-management features Windows 7 Power plan: Energy Star
Turn off the display:
After 10 minutes
Put the computer to sleep:
After 25 minutes
Advanced power settings:
- Turn off hard disks:
After 20 minutes
- Hibernate: After 1 hour To awaken your computer from a Sleep mode, press any key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, refer to your Windows Help and Support information system. 12 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 13 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Product specific Notices Electronic emissions notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The following information refers to Lenovo IdeaPad Y480/Y580, machine type 20131, 2093 /
20132, 2099.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible party:
Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Telephone: (919) 294-5900 13 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 14 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Product specific Notices
Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
German Class B Compliance Statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:
Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/
336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/
eingebaut werden. Deutschland:
Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmittein Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC
(frher 89/336/EWG), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-
Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo (Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B. 14 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 15 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Product specific Notices
European Union Compliance Statement Class B Compliance European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/
EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Such cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors. IC Statement :
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Industry Canada - Class B This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus, ICES-003 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil numrique respecte les limites de bruits radiolectriques applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matrial brouilleur: Appareils Numriques, NMB-003 dicte par lIndustrie. RF exposure warning:
This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This Transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any antenna or transmitters. Avertissement d'exposition RF:
Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition de rayonnement de la FCC rf dtermines pour un environnement non contrl. Cet metteur ne doit pas n'tre complant ou opration en mme temps qu'aucune autre antenne ou metteur. 15 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 16 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Specifications Model Name: IdeaPad Y480/Y580 Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Lenovo reserves Machine Type 20131, 2093 / 20132, 2099 the right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Platform Platform Memory Y480 Y580 Appr. 345 mm 239 mm 20 - 32.8 mm Appr. 385 mm 255 mm 22 - 35.7 mm Appr. 2.2 kg with 6 cell battery Appr. 2.7 kg with 6 cell battery 14-inch wide 15.6-inch wide Intel Chief River platform Type and speed DDR3-1600 DDR3-1066 or DDR3-1333 Maximum supported capacity Slots Hard disk drive Form factor Interface Optical drive Form factor Type Display 8 GB SODIMM 2 2.5-inch, 9.5 mm or 7 mm, 5400 rpm or 7200 rpm 2.5-inch, 9.5 mm or 7 mm, 5400 rpm SATA 150 12.7 mm DVD Rambo or Blu-ray Combo / Rambo Display resolution (LCD) 1366 768 pixels 1366 768 pixels or 1920 1020 pixels Maximum display resolution on external display device LCD backlight 2048 1536 pixels LED 16 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 17 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Specifications I/O Ports USB Audio Communication Video/Audio Video Memory card slot Battery pack Type Cells/Capacity AC adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera Security USB 2.0 2, USB 3.0 2 Headphone jack 1, Mic-in jack 1 RJ-45 1 HDMI 1 VGA 1 6 in 1 slot 1 (SD/SD PRO/MMC/MS/MS PRO/xD) Li-Ion 6 cell, 48 Wh or 62 Wh 100 - 240 V, 50 - 60 Hz AC 20 V DC 120 W HD Camera Kensington slot 1 17 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 18 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo IdeaPad OneKey VeriFace Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. NVIDIA and Optimus are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the United States and other countries. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. Premium Surround Sound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS Premium Surround Sound provides the ultimate audio experience for music, movies and games on the PC. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 18
various | user guide | Users Manual | 1.49 MiB | September 03 2012 |
Introduction: Broadcom BCM94313HMG2L PCI-E Mini Card User's Guide Before you begin Things you should know BCM94313HMG2L network Before you begin Obtain the following information from your network administrator (if you are a home user, obtain this information from the person that installed your wireless access point):
l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks that you want to connect to. l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks you want to connect to. l For Microsoft Windows networking, your customer name and workgroup name. l For your network account, your user name and password. l Your IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Things you should know When you start your computer, your Broadcom BCM94313HMG2L PCI-E Mini card detects certain wireless networks that are within range. Before you can connect to these and other wireless networks, you must configure a profile for each network using the information you obtained from your network administrator. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in the IEEE 802.11g standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network you are connecting to has enabled WEP, you must also enable WEP in the network profile and set the WEP key to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, you cannot connect to the network. Broadcom BCM94313HMG2L network The Broadcom BCM94313HMG2L solution allows you to make a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated below. Back to top Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Back to Contents Page Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Overview Utility Components Overview The Broadcom Wireless Utility enables you to do the following network tasks:
l Manage your wireless networks and create network connection profiles (Wireless Networks tab) l Connect to available networks (utility icon in notification area) l Get information about the network status and signal and noise of your network connection (Link Status tab) l View current and accumulated statistics (Statistics tab) l Find out which broadcasting networks are in range and search for nonbroadcasting networks (Site Monitor tab) l Run tests on the wireless network adapter (Diagnostics tab) l Get date and version information about the utility, and software, hardware, and location details about your wireless network adapter (Information tab) l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-
provisioning and A-ID group changes (Wireless Networks tab) l Manually import EAP-FAST PACs (Wireless Networks tab) In the utility, you can open Wireless Network Wizard to connect to a basic network or create an ad hoc network, or you can open the Wireless Network Connection Settings tool to connect to an advanced network. To do any of the other tasks, click the tab that is associated with the described task. To start using the utility, right-click the utility icon If the icon is not available, open Broadcom Wireless Utility in Control Panel. in the notification area, and then click Open Utility. NOTE: The utility icon may not appear exactly as shown here. See "Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon."
Utility Components Utility components include the utility icon in the notification area, the six utility tabs, and Wireless Network Connection Settings. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (1 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Utility Icon To do any of the following tasks or operations, right-click the utility icon, and then click the appropriate item. l Open the on-line Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide
(Help Files) l Open About WLAN Card Utility to view links to Broadcom and Broadcom Customer Support websites and to view the version and date of the utility (About) l Hide the utility icon (Hide Tray Icon) l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Connect to any of the networks for which you have created a connection profile and are within range (Connect To) l Open the utility to the Wireless Networks tab (Open Utility) l Open the utility to the Link Status tab to view information about the connection (Status) l Display a log of your wireless network events (Display Log) Wireless Networks Tab The Wireless Networks tab has tools that enable you to do the following:
l Use the utility to manage your wireless networks l Add a network connection profile l Edit or remove a network connection profile l Change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections l Connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Show or hide the utility icon in the notification area l Choose which type of network to access l Lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile l Save your wireless network connection profiles as a WPN file l Import a WPN file l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-
provisioning and A-ID group changes l Manually import EAP-FAST PACS On the Add menu, you can use either the wireless network wizard that is available from Broadcom Wireless Utility (see Connecting to a Basic Network or Creating an Ad Hoc Network Using the Wireless Network Wizard") or the utility (see "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility") to add a network connection profile. To use the utility to manage your wireless networks, select the Let this tool manage your wireless networks check box. To add a network connection profile, click the Add arrow, and then click either Use Wizard (basic network) or Use Utility (advanced network). To edit or remove a network connection profile, right-click the network name, and then click either Edit or Remove. To change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections, click the network name, and then click either the up arrow or down arrow. To connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list, right-click the network name, and then click Connect. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (2 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide To disable the radio, clear the Enable radio check box. To enable the radio, select the Enable radio check box. To hide the utility icon utility icon check box.
, clear the Show utility icon check box. To show the icon, select the Show To choose the type of network to access, click the Options arrow, and then click Advanced. To lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the network name, and then click Lock or Unlock, as appropriate. NOTE: You must have system or administrator rights to be able to lock or unlock a profile. To save your wireless network connection profiles to a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Export (see "Saving Preferred Network Connection Settings to a File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."
To import a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Import (see "Importing a Preferred Network Connection Profiles File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."
Click Apply or OK after you change any of the settings for the change to take effect. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (3 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide For networks that use the EAP-FAST authentication method, the Wireless WLAN Card Utility automatically adds trusted servers to the trust list and accepts auto-provisioning and AID (A-ID) group changes by default. The utility also enables you to import a Protected Access Credential (PAC). From the utility, you can also manually add or delete trusted servers, enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-
provisioning and A-ID group changes, or import or delete PACS, as described in the following instructions. In general, you should use the default settings. Therefore, check with the network administrator before you make any changes. To manually add a trusted server to the trust list 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Click Add. 4. Type the A-ID friendly name of the trusted server in the space provided, and then click OK. To delete a trusted server from the trust list file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (4 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. In the Trust list (A-ID), click the name of the trusted server you want to delete, and then click Delete. To change the default settings for administering Cisco Compatible Extensions 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Clear the Disable auto-provision prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or rejection. 4. Clear the Disable A-ID group change prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or 5. Select the Auto-provision PAC only once check box to auto-provision a Protected Access rejection. Credential (PAC) only once. To import or remove an EAP-FAST PAC 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and 3. To import a PAC: in Protected Access Credentials, click Add, and then follow the on-screen then click Manage PACs. instructions. NOTE: The PAC is password protected, so you must know the password to be able to import the PAC.
-or-
To remove a PAC: click anywhere in the row that lists the PAC, and then click Remove. Link Status Network status and signal and noise information about your network connection is displayed on the Link Status tab. NOTES:
l For IEEE 802.11n connections, speed is indicated by an MCS value. l Radio Stream information is provided only for IEEE 802.11n connections. l Click anywhere in the Signal & noise history box to change the type of history being displayed. Successive clicks change the type from both signal and noise, to noise only, to signal only, and back to both signal and noise. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (5 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The status of your network connection is also indicated by the appearance of the utility icon number and color of the radio waves indicates the strength or weakness of the signal (see Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon for details). The To view the network name (SSID), speed, signal strength rating, connection status, and the client IP address of the network connection, move your mouse pointer over the utility icon. NOTE: On computers running Windows XP, you also can view the SSID, speed, signal strength rating, and connection status by moving your mouse pointer over the Windows Wireless Network Connection icon in the notification area. Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (6 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Icon Appearance Indicated Received Signal Strength The signal strength is very good or excellent. The signal strength is weak. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. No signal is being received. See Troubleshooting for probable causes and suggested action. The radio is disabled or switched off. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. Statistics On the Statistics tab under Current, the following current statistics are shown:
l Network name (SSID) l Connection time l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost l Total packets lost (%) Under Accumulated, the following accumulated statistics are shown:
l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (7 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Site Monitor Basic Site Monitor On the Site Monitor tab, the basic Site Monitor displays information about wireless routers/APs and ad hoc networks that are within range. To sort the list, click the column heading that shows the characteristic you want to sort by. For example, to sort by signal strength, click Signal . To view information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network. The network information is shown under Selected Network. To view or change the network connection settings for a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Editif you have not yet created a network connection profile for that particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network and want to do so, click Add . To see the information elements for a listed AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the AP or ad hoc network, and then click Show Information Elements. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (8 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide NOTES:
l Nonbroadcasting networks are labeled (nonbroadcasting) under Network Name. l The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting APs to which you are not currently connected. l The symbols under AP Band indicate IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, or IEEE 802.11n operation. To see more detailed information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Advanced. Advanced Site Monitor To save the activity log to a file, click the Options arrow, and then click Start Log. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (9 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide You can adjust the time interval between scans by clicking the Options arrow, and then clicking either one of the preset values or clicking Customize to specify a different time interval. NOTE: The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting networks to which you are not currently connected. To view detailed network information for a single nonbroadcasting network, type the network name in the Look for box, and then click Find. To reset the site monitor to the broadcasting networks, click Clear. Diagnostics On the Diagnostics tab, you can run a number of tests to determine if your wireless network adapter is functioning properly. Select the tests you want to run, and then click Run. For information about an individual test, look under Information before you click Run. To see the test results, look under Information after you click Run. NOTE: The network connection is lost when you run the tests. When the test run is over, your network connection is automatically reestablished. Also, you can view a log of your wireless network events. To do so, click Log. Examples of wireless network events that are logged include:
file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (10 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide l Initiation of user session l Connecting to a network l Disconnecting from current network l Authentication mode being used l Driver status l Supplicant status l New wireless device available l Initializing wireless state machine l Wireless utility is managing this adapter l Wireless utility is not managing this adapter If your Broadcom 802.11 Network Adapter fails any of the diagnostics tests, go to http://www.broadcom. com/ for technical support. Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (11 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The following information is displayed on the Information tab:
l Software details l Hardware details l Location details (shows the country for which the driver is installed and the channels supported for that location) Wireless Network Connection Settings The Wireless Network Connection Settings component is intended for use by advanced users or network administrators. You can use Wireless Network Connection Settings to create a connection profile for an advanced infrastructure network, a basic infrastructure network, or an ad hoc network (see " Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility"). Back to Contents Page file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (12 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Regulatory Statement for BCM94313HMG2L 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Page 1 of 6 Regulatory Statement for BCM94313HMG2L If the module is installed in portable hosts, where the separation distance between radiating elements and the user is less than 20cm, additional equipment authorization procedure to address RF exposure compliance shall apply. If the module is installed with other transmitting devices which can transmit simultaneously with this device and antenna-to-antenna distance is less 20cm, assessing RF exposure compliance with multiple transmitters within a host device shall be performed based upon FCC requirements. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Page 2 of 6 Regulatory Statement for BCM94313HMG2L Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:
802.11a Restrictions:
- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).
- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.
- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.
- This product can be used as shown in the table below:
5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:
User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:
2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:
In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:
Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Page 3 of 6 Regulatory Statement for BCM94313HMG2L Note for system integrators:
- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.
- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:
Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 4 of 6 Regulatory Statement for BCM94313HMG2L 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.
"
"
6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide
"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."
Translation:
"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."
8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. Page 5 of 6 Regulatory Statement for BCM94313HMG2L 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. 12. Taiwan NCC Taiwan NCC warning statement Appendix:
(ID):
CCXXxxLPyyyZz
,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . Page 6 of 6
various | user manual | Users Manual | 550.18 KiB |
Lenovo IdeaPad U310/U410 User Guide V1.0 Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (March 2011) Copyright Lenovo 2011. LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights to use, reproduction and disclosure. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer...................................1 Top view..........................................1 Left-side view .................................4 Right-side view...............................5 Front view .......................................7 Bottom view ....................................8 Chapter 2. Learning the basics......................................10 First use..........................................10 Using AC adapter and battery ...12 Connecting external devices.......14 Securing your computer..............16 Switchable Graphics in two modes
(on select models).........................17 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet ....................................19 Wired connection......................... 19 Wireless connection..................... 21 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system.....................................23 OneKey Rescue system ............... 23 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting...26 Frequently asked questions........ 26 Troubleshooting........................... 28 Specifications.........................32 Trademarks.............................34 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U310 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer
U410 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Note: The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product.
Attention:
Do NOT open the display panel beyond 130 degrees. When closing the display panel, be careful NOT to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a b c d e Use the camera for video communication. Integrated camera Wireless module antennas Computer display The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant The built-in antennas ensure optimal reception of wireless radio. visual output. Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 18. f Touchpad The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Note: For details, see Using the touchpad on page 11. g Speakers The stereo speakers provide rich and powerful sound. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U310 1 2 3 4 5
U410 1 2 5 6 a OneKey Rescue system button Press this button to open OneKey Rescue system when the computer is powered off. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 23. b Fan louvers Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that none of the fan louvers are blocked or else overheating of the computer may occur. c RJ-45 port This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 19. d HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. e USB 2.0 port Connect to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 15. f Combo audio jack Connects to headphones or headsets. The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U310
U410 1 2 3 4 1 5 3 6 7 4 a b Built-in microphone The built-in microphone (with noise reduction) can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or simple audio recordings. Combo audio jack Connects to headphones or headsets. The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. c USB 3.0 port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 15. d AC power adapter jack Connect the AC adapter here. Note: For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 12. e Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 14. f HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer g RJ-45 port This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 19. 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Front view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U310
U410 1 2 2 a Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 14. b System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 18. 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U310 1 8 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer
U410 1 a Air inlet louvers Make outside air go inside the computer through the louvers. 9 Chapter 2. Learning the basics First use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Reading the manuals Read the supplied manuals before using your computer.
Conncting to the power The supplied battery pack is not fully charged at purchase. To charge the battery and begin using your computer, insert the battery pack and connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is automatically charged while the computer is running on AC power. Installing the battery pack Refer to the supplied Setup Poster to install the battery pack. Connecting the computer to an electrical outlet 1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC power adapter jack of the computer firmly. 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
Turning on the computer Press the power button to turn on the computer.
Configuring the operating system You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below. Accepting the end user license agreement Configuring the Internet connection Registering the operating system Creating a user account 10 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Putting your computer into sleep state or shutting it down When you finish working with your computer, you can put it into sleep state or shut it down. Putting your computer into sleep state If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer into sleep state. When the computer is in sleep state, you can quickly wake it to resume use, and bypass the startup process. To put the computer into sleep state, do one of the following. Click Press Fn + F1. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is in sleep state) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. and select Sleep from the Start menu. To wake the computer, do one of the following. Press the power button. Press any key on the keyboard.
Shutting down your computer If you are not going to use your computer for a day or two, shut it down. To shut down your computer, click menu. and select Shut down from the Start 11 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using AC adapter and battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Checking battery status You can determine the percentage of battery power remaining by checking the battery icon in the notification area. Note: As each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:
The amount of energy stored in the battery when you commence work. The way you use your computer: for example, how often you access the hard disk drive and how bright you make the computer display.
Charging the battery When you find that the battery power is low, you need to charge the battery or replace it with a fully charged one. You need to charge the battery in any of the following situations:
When you purchase a new battery If the battery status indicator starts blinking If the battery has not been used for a long time Notes:
You are advised to insert the battery pack when using your computer to prevent small particles from entering the inside of your computer. To increase the life of the battery pack, the computer does not start recharging the battery immediately after it drops from fully charged. Charge the battery at a temperature between 50 F and 86 F (10 C-30 C). Full charge or discharge is not required. 12 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Handling the battery If the rechargeable battery pack is replaced with an incorrect type, there may be danger of an explosion. The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury and detriment to the environment, pay attention to the following points:
Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo. Keep the battery pack away from fire. Do not expose the battery pack to water or rain. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery pack. Do not short-circuit the battery pack. Keep the battery pack away from children. Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your companys safety standards. 13 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting external devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Your computer has a wide range of built-in features and connection capabilities.
Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:
Secure Digital (SD) card MultiMediaCard (MMC) Notes:
This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Insert ONLY one card in the slot at a time. Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it via Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 14 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Connecting USB devices You can connect a USB device to your computer by inserting its USB plug
(Type A) into the USB port on your computer. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver is installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after connecting it, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data by that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area of Windows to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 15 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Securing your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This section provides information about how to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.
Attaching a security lock (not supplied) You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Refer to the Left-side view on page 4 for the location of the Kensington slot. Notes:
Before purchasing any security product, verify that it is compatible with this type of security keyhole. You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security features. Lenovo offers no comment judgement or warranty regarding the function, quality or performance of locking devices and security features.
Using VeriFace VeriFace is a face recognition software which takes a digital snapshot, extracts key features of your face, and creates a digital map that becomes the systems password. If you want to activate VeriFace for the first time, click the VeriFace icon on the desktop to register your facial image. Notes:
The face registration and verification works best in an environment with steady and even light. You can determine whether to use this function when you log on the system. For more details on VeriFace, see the software help. 16 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Using passwords Using passwords helps prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a password and enable it, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. The computer cannot be used unless you enter the correct password. Note: This password can be from one to seven alphanumeric characters in any combination. For details about how to set the password, see the Help to the right of the screen in BIOS setup utility. Note: To enter BIOS setup utility, press F2 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up. Switchable Graphics in two modes
(on select models) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The Lenovo G-series model supports Switchable Graphics in two modes:
Mode 1 Select the graphics processor based on application needs In this mode, the system allocates a graphics processor to some applications automatically. Alternatively, you can also manually select a graphics processor for your applications. The default setting of your computer is Mode 1. To switch to Mode 2, please refer to Switching between Mode 1 and Mode 2. Mode 2 Select the graphics processor manually or based on power source In this mode, you can select a graphics processor manually or based on the power source status (AC/DC):
High-performance GPU: It is also referred to as the independent GPU, which can provide higher graphics processing and display performance. Power-Saving GPU: It is also referred to as the integrated GPU, which can enable a longer running time of the battery. Switch between the two graphics processors as follows:
1 Start your computer under the Windows 7 operating system. 2 Click Start All Programs Catalyst Control Center, and run the CCC. 3 Click Power Switchable Graphics on the Catalyst Control Center setting page. 17 Chapter 2. Learning the basics 4 On the Switchable Graphics page, the currently active GPU is displayed under the current active graphics processing unit. You can click High-performance GPU or Power-Saving GPU under Choose a Graphics Processing Unit to switch the graphics processor. Switching between Mode 1 and Mode 2 Switch between the two modes as follows:
1 Start your computer under the Windows 7 operating system. 2 Click Start All Programs Catalyst Control Center, and run the CCC. 3 On the Catalyst Control Center setting page, click Power Switchable Graphics Method, choose Select the graphics processor manually or based on power source, and click Apply. 4 On the Switchable Graphics dialog box that appears, click Change to switch between the two modes. 5 On the contrary, you can switch back to Mode 1 from Mode 2. Note: It may take several seconds to switch between Mode 1 and Mode 2. Prior to switching between the two modes or manual switching between the two GPUs, it is recommended that you close any running applications. Under the Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system, none of the configurations supports switching between graphics processors, and they can work only under the mode of integrated GPU. 18 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet As a global network, the Internet connects computers worldwide, providing services such as e-mailing, information searching, electronic commerce, Web browsing and entertainment. You can connect the computer to the Internet in the following ways:
Wired connection: use physical wiring to connect. Wireless network technology: connect without wiring. Wired connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wired connections are a reliable and safe way to connect the computer to the Internet. Cable Cable Internet services use a cable modem connected to the residential cable TV line. DSL is a family of related technologies that bring high-
speed network access to homes and small businesses over ordinary telephone lines. DSL 19 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet
Hardware connection:
Cable DSL TV cable Telephone line Splitter *
*
Splitter *
*
Cable modem *
DSL modem *
*
*
* Not supplied. Note: The above diagrams are for reference only. Actual connection method may vary.
Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 20 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Wireless connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wireless connections provide mobile access to the Internet, allowing you to stay online anywhere the wireless signal covers. Divided by the signal scales, wireless connection to the Internet can be built based on the following standards. Wi-Fi WiMAX Wi-Fi networks cover a small physical area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings. An access point is necessary for the connection. WiMAX networks connect several Wireless LAN systems to cover a metropolitan area, providing high-
speed broadband access without the need for cables. Note: Your computer may not support all wireless connection methods. 21 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet
Using Wi-Fi/WiMAX (on select models) Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless communications, do the following:
1 Slide the integrated wireless device switch from 2 Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Hardware connection to
. Wi-Fi/WiMAX network Access point *
* Not supplied Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and search Windows Help and Support Center for details on how to configure your computer. 22 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system OneKey Rescue system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Introduction The Lenovo OneKey Rescue system is an easy-to-use application that can be used to back up the data on your system partition (C drive) for easy restore when required. You can run Lenovo OneKey Recovery under the Windows operating system, and the OneKey Rescue system without starting the Windows operating system. Attention:
In order to utilize the features of the OneKey Rescue system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and OneKey Rescue system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons and is the reason the available disk space is less than it claims. The exact available hard disk space depends on the file size of the mirror image file (based on the size of operating system and preinstalled software).
Using Lenovo OneKey Recovery (within Windows operating system) In Windows operating system, double click the OneKey Recovery system Icon on the desktop to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Within the program, you can back up the system partition on the hard disk drive, other storage devices, or by creating recovery discs. Notes:
The backup process and creation of recovery discs may take some time, connect the AC adapter and battery pack to your computer. After the recovery discs are burned, please number them so that you can use them in the correct order. Computers without an integrated optical drive support the creation of recovery discs;
however an appropriate external optical drive is needed to physically create the recovery discs. For more instructions, see the Help file of Lenovo OneKey Recovery. 23 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system
Using Lenovo OneKey Rescue system (without Windows operating system) In the event that the operating system cannot be loaded, follow the steps below to access OneKey Rescue system. Shut down your computer. Press the key to launch OneKey Rescue system. Within the program, you can choose to restore your system partition to the original factory status, or to a previously generated backup. Note: The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any critical data before using the recovery feature.
Creating a recovery disc(s) Your computer does not ship with a recovery disc. You can use Lenovo OneKey Recovery system to create a recovery disc(s), which can be used to start and restore your computer in case of a system failure. To create a recovery disc(s):
Insert a recordable disc into the optical drive on your computer. Note: If your computer does not come with an integrated optical drive or if the integrated optical drive does not support disc creating, connect an appropriate external optical drive to your computer. In Windows, press the OneKey Rescue system button to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. On the main screen, click Create Recovery Disc. Choose the type of recovery disc(s). You can create three types of recovery disc(s): recovery disc(s) with existing backup image, recovery disc(s) from the current system partition, and factory default recovery disc(s). Select the type of recovery disc you want to create and follow the on-screen instructions. Insert additional recordable disc(s) when prompted. 24 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system Notes:
The estimated number of discs needed will be displayed before the process of creating the recovery disc(s) begins. To minimize the number of discs needed, use recordable DVDs as the media. Also make sure your optical drive is compatible with the disc intended for use. After recovery disc creation, number the discs appropriately for use in their correct order. The first disc created will be used to start the computer in the case of a system failure. 25 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This section lists frequently asked questions and tells where you can find detailed answers. What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?
See Chapter 1. Important safety information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. How can I prevent problems with my computer?
See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. What are the main hardware features of my computer?
More information can be found in Chapter 1 and 2. Where can I find the detailed specifications for my computer?
See http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. I need to upgrade a device or I need to replace one of the following: the hard disk drive, memory, or the keyboard. See Appendix A. CRU instructions on page 35 of this guide. Where are the recovery discs?
Your computer did not come with a recovery disc. For an explanation of the alternative recovery methods offered by Lenovo, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 23. Where are the installation discs for preinstalled programs?
Installation discs for preinstalled programs are not supplied with Windows preinstalled computers. You can visit the Lenovo consumer support Web site to find all preinstalled software downloads. By default, you can find some installation backups for certain preinstalled software in the APP folder under the D driver. How can I contact the customer support center?
See " Chapter 3. Getting help and service" of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 26 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Where can I find warranty information?
For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. How can I install the device drivers?
A compatible device driver is a requirement to ensure correct operation and performance of each component in your computer. If your computer is pre-installed with an operating system, Lenovo provides all drivers that you need in your hard disk. What can I do if the backup process fails?
If you can start the backup feature without a problem, but it fails during the backup process, please try the following steps:
1 Close other programs, then restart the backup process. 2 Check if the destination media is damaged, try to select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to the factory status?
You can use this feature when your system fails or you need to re-install your operating system. This will restore your computer back to the initial status when you first booted up your computer after receiving it from the store. If there is critical data on your current partition, back it up before you run this recovery feature. 27 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
If you do not find your problem here, see Chapter 2. The following section only describes problems that might negate the need to refer to the more comprehensive information in Chapter 2. Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. My screen goes blank while the computer is on. If the screen is blank, make sure that:
- The battery is installed correctly.
- The AC adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.
- The computer power is on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.)
- The memory is installed correctly. If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to the original factory contents using OneKey Rescue system. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced. Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to exit from the screen saver or to resume from sleep or hibernation mode:
- Touch the touchpad.
- Press any key on the keyboard.
- Press the power button.
- Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the backlight for the LCD screen has been turned off. 28 Password problems I forgot my password. Chapter 5. Troubleshooting If you forget your user password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password changed. If you forget your HDD password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. If you forget your supervisor password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Sleep or hibernation problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, or replace the battery with a fully charged one. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-
on self-test (POST). Make sure that:
- The battery is charged.
- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note:If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. The computer does not return from sleep mode and the com-
puter does not work. If the computer does not return from sleep mode, it may have entered hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the power indicator. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press any key or the power button. If your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press the power button to resume operation. Note: If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC adapter and the battery. 29 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Computer screen problems The screen is blank. Do the following:
- If you are using the AC adapter, or using the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press Fn + to make the screen brighter.
- If the power indicator is in blinking, press the power button to resume from the sleep mode.
- If the problem persist, follow the solution in the following problem The screen is unreadable or distorted.
- Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the LCD screen has been turned off. Make sure that:
- The display device driver is installed correctly.
- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.
- The monitor type is correct. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Incorrect characters appear on the screen. Did you install the operating system or programs correctly?
If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the vol-
ume is turned up. Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indica-
tor shows empty.
-or-
Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery. Make sure that:
- The Mute function is off.
- The headphone jack is not used.
- Speakers are selected as the playback device. Discharge and recharge the battery. The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. A hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive does not work. In the Boot menu in BIOS setup utility, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot Device Priority correctly. 30 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting A startup problem The Microsoft Windows oper-
ating system does not start. Use the OneKey Rescue system to help solve or identify your problem. For details about OneKey Rescue system, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 23. OneKey Rescue system problems Backup cannot be made. You are not currently using a Windows operating system. There is not enough space to store the backed up data. You will need to free more hard disk space on your system partition (C drive). Fail to restore system partition to factory default. The system partition, such as the partition size or the drive capacity of C, has been modified. Other problems Your computer does not respond. To turn off your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC adapter and the battery. Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. The computer does not start from a device you want. See the Boot menu of the BIOS setup utility. Make sure that the Boot Device Priority in the BIOS setup utility is set so that the computer starts from the device you want. The connected external device does not work. Also make sure that the device from which the computer starts is enabled. In the Boot menu in the BIOS setup utility, make sure that the device is included in the Boot Device Priority list. Press F12 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up to select the device you want the computer starts from. Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. When using a high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or system shut down may result. 31 Specifications Model Name: U310/U410 Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Machine Type: 20169, 3725 / 20170, 3726 Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. U310 U410 Appr. 333 mm 225 mm 18 mm Appr. 1.7 kg 13.3-inch Appr. 344 mm 235 mm 21 mm Appr. 1.8 kg 14.0-inch Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Platform Platform Memory Type and speed Maximum supported capacity 4 GB Slots Hard disk drive Intel Panther point & HM77 DDR3-1333 or DDR3-1600 8 GB SODIMM 2 2.5-inch, 9.5 mm or 2.5-inch, 7.0 mm SATA II 16:9 (1,336 768 pixels) 2,048 1,536 pixels LED Form factor 2.5-inch, 7.0 mm Interface Display Display resolution (LCD) Maximum display resolution on external display device LCD backlight 32 Specifications I/O Ports USB Audio Communication Video/Audio Card reader Battery pack Type USB 2.0 1, USB 3.0 2 USB 2.0 2, USB 3.0 2 Combo audio jack 1 RJ-45 1 HDMI 1 2 in 1 slot 1 (MMC, SD) Li-Polymer Cells/Capacity 3 cell, 46 Wh 4 cell, 59 Wh AC adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera 100 - 240 V, 50 - 60 Hz AC 20 V DC 40 W or 65 W 65 W or 90 W 0.3 or 1.0 mega pixels 33 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo OneKey VeriFace Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. AMD, the AMD Arrow logo, ATI, the ATI logo, AMD Athlon, AMD LIVEI, AMD Phenom, AMD Sempron, AMD Turion, AMD64, All-in-Wonder, Avivo, Catalyst, CrossFireX, FirePro, FireStream, HyperMemory, OverDrive, PowerPlay, PowerXpress, Radeon, Remote Wonder, Stream, SurroundView, Theater, TV Wonder, The Ultimate Visual Experience, and combinations thereof are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. Premium Surround Sound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS Premium Surround Sound provides the ultimate audio experience for music, movies and games on the PC. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 34 IMPORTANT NOTE:
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Radiation Exposure StatementThis EUT is compliance with SAR for general population/uncontrolled exposure limits in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1999 and had been tested in accordance with the measurement methods and procedures specified in OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C. L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 1 V1.0_en-US
various | user manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.26 MiB | December 04 2012 |
Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485/
Z580/Z585 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a 2 0 1 1 i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com V1.0_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes
Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations used in this manual are for Lenovo IdeaPad Z380 unless otherwise stated. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the product you are using. Regulatory Notice
To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (December 2011) Copyright Lenovo 2011. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer..........................1 Top view..........................................1 Left-side view .................................4 Right-side view...............................5 Front view .......................................6 Bottom view ....................................7 Chapter 2. Learning the basics........................................8 First use............................................8 Using AC adapter and battery ..... 10 Using the touchpad......................12 Using the keyboard......................13 Connecting external devices.......16 Special keys and buttons.............19 System status indicators..............23 Securing your computer..............24 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet....................................26 Wired connection .........................26 Wireless connection .....................28 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system.....................................30 OneKey Rescue system ...............30 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting ....33 Frequently asked questions ........33 Troubleshooting ...........................35 Appendix A. CRU instructions ............................40 Replacing the battery pack..........40 Replacing the hard disk drive ....41 Replacing memory .......................45 Removing the optical drive ........48 Trademarks.............................50 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485 h a b c d fe i j g 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer
Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585 h a b c d fe i j g
Attention:
Do NOT open the display panel beyond 130 degrees. When closing the display panel, be careful NOT to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 2 a b c d e f g h i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Use the camera for video communication. Integrated camera Wireless module antennas Computer display The computer display with LED backlight provides The built-in antennas ensure optimal reception of wireless radio. brilliant visual output. The stereo speakers provide rich and powerful sound. Speakers Power button OneKey Rescue system button Press this button to turn on the computer. Press this button to start OneKey Rescue system when the computer is powered off. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 30. System status indicators Cap sensor buttons Built-in microphone For details, see System status indicators on page 23. For details, see Cap Sensor buttons on page 20. The built-in microphone (with noise reduction) can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or simple audio recordings. j Touchpad The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Note: For details, see Using the touchpad on page 12. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b c d e f a b Kensington slot Note: For details, see Attaching a security lock (not supplied) on page 24. Attach a security lock (not supplied) here. Fan louvers Note: Make sure that none of the fan louvers are blocked or else overheating of the Dissipate internal heat. computer may occur. c d VGA port RJ-45 port Connects to external display devices. This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 26. e HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. f USB port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 17. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Lenovo IdeaPad Z380 ba c d e
Lenovo IdeaPad Z480/Z485/Z580/Z585 ba d c d e a Headphone jack Connects to external headphones.
Attention:
Listening to music at high volume over extended periods of time may damage your hearing. Microphone jack Connects to external microphones. Optical drive USB port Reads/Burns optical discs. Connects to USB devices. b c d Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 17. e AC power adapter jack Connect the AC adapter here. Note: For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 10. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Front view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 16.
6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b c d Battery latch -
manual Battery pack Hard disk drive /
Memory / Central processing unit /
Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment Battery latch -
spring loaded
The manual battery latch is used to keep the battery pack secured in place. For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 10. The spring-loaded battery latch keeps the battery pack secured in place. 7 Chapter 2. Learning the basics First use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Reading the manuals Read the supplied manuals before using your computer.
Connecting to the power The supplied battery pack is not fully charged at purchase. To charge the battery and begin using your computer, insert the battery pack and connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is automatically charged while the computer is running on AC power. Installing the battery pack Refer to the supplied Setup Poster to install the battery pack. Connecting the computer to an electrical outlet 1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC power adapter jack of the computer firmly. 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
Turning on the computer Press the power button to turn on the computer.
Configuring the operating system You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below.
Accepting the end user license agreement
Configuring the Internet connection
Registering the operating system
Creating a user account 8 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Putting your computer into sleep state or shutting it down When you finish working with your computer, you can put it into sleep state or shut it down. Putting your computer into sleep state If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer into sleep state. When the computer is in sleep state, you can quickly wake it to resume use, and bypass the startup process. To put the computer into sleep state, do one of the following.
Click
Press Fn + F1. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is in sleep state) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. and select Sleep from the Start menu. To wake the computer, do one of the following.
Press the power button.
Press any key on the keyboard.
Shutting down your computer If you are not going to use your computer for a day or two, shut it down. To shut down your computer, click menu. and select Shut down from the Start 9 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using AC adapter and battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Checking battery status You can determine the percentage of battery power remaining by checking the battery icon in the notification area. Note: As each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:
The amount of energy stored in the battery when you commence work.
The way you use your computer: for example, how often you access the hard disk drive and how bright you make the computer display.
Charging the battery When you find that the battery power is low, you need to charge the battery or replace it with a fully charged one. You need to charge the battery in any of the following situations:
When you purchase a new battery
If the battery status indicator starts blinking
If the battery has not been used for a long time Notes:
You are advised to insert the battery pack when using your computer to prevent small particles from entering the inside of your computer. To increase the life of the battery pack, the computer does not start recharging the battery immediately after it drops from fully charged. Charge the battery at a temperature between 50 F and 86 F (10 C-30 C). Full charge or discharge is not required. 10 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Removing the battery pack If you are not going to use the computer for an extended period of time, or if you need to send your computer to Lenovo for service, etc. remove the battery pack from the computer. Before removing the battery pack, make sure the computer has been shut down.
Handling the battery If the rechargeable battery pack is replaced with an incorrect type, there may be danger of an explosion. The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury and detriment to the environment, pay attention to the following points:
Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo.
Keep the battery pack away from fire.
Do not expose the battery pack to water or rain.
Do not attempt to disassemble the battery pack.
Do not short-circuit the battery pack.
Keep the battery pack away from children.
Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your companys safety standards. 11 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the touchpad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b a Touchpad b Touchpad button To move the cursor on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the cursor to move. The function of the left/right side corresponds to that of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Note: You can enable/disable the touchpad using Fn + F6. When the touchpad indicator is lit, the touchpad is disabled. 12 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the keyboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Your computer has a numeric keypad and function keys incorporated in its standard keyboard.
Numeric keypad Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485 The keyboard has keys that, when enabled, work as a 10-key numeric keypad. To enable or disable the numeric keypad, press Fn + F8. Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585 The keyboard has a separate numeric keypad. To enable or disable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key. 13 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Function key combinations Through the use of the function keys, you can change operational features instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn
; then press one of the function keys a
. b b b a 14 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Fn + F3:
Fn + F4:
Fn + F5:
The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + Esc:
Fn + F1:
Fn + F2:
Turn on/off the integrated camera. Enter sleep mode. Turn on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Open the interface for the display device switch to select this notebook or an external display. Open the interface for display resolution settings. Open the interface for integrated wireless devices settings (On/Off). Enable/Disable the touchpad. Enable/Disable the numeric keypad. Start/Pause playback of Windows Media Player. Stop playback of Windows Media Player. Skip to the previous track. Skip to the next track. Fn + F6:
Fn + F8 (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485):
Fn + F9:
Fn + F10:
Fn + F11:
Fn + F12:
Fn + Insert (Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585):
Fn + PgUp
(Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/
Z480/Z485):
Fn + PrtSc:
Fn + Home:
Fn + End:
Fn + PgDn (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485): Activate the insert function. Fn + / :
Fn + / :
Activate the system request. Activate the pause function. Activate the break function. Enable/Disable the scroll lock. Increase/Decrease display brightness. Increase/Decrease sound volume. 15 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting external devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Your computer has a wide range of built-in features and connection capabilities.
Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:
Secure Digital (SD) card
MultiMediaCard (MMC)
Secure Digital PRO (SD PRO) (Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585)
Memory Stick (MS) (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485)
Memory Stick PRO (MS PRO)
xD-Picture (xD) card Notes:
This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Insert ONLY one card in the slot at a time. Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it via Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 16 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Connecting USB devices Your computer comes with 3 or 4 USB ports compatible with USB devices. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver is installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after connecting it, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data by that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area of Windows to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 17 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Connecting Bluetooth enabled devices (on select models) If your computer has an integrated Bluetooth adapter card, it can connect to and transfer data wirelessly with other Bluetooth enabled devices, such as notebook computers, PDAs and cell phones. You can transfer data between these devices without cables and up to 10 meters range in open space. Note: The actual maximum range may vary due to interference and transmission barriers. To get the best possible connection speed, place the device as near your computer as possible. Enabling Bluetooth communications on your computer 1 Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Notes:
When you do not need to use the Bluetooth function, turn it off to save battery power. You need to pair the Bluetooth enabled device with your computer before you can transfer data between them. Read the documentation supplied with the Bluetooth enabled device for details on how to pair the device with your computer. 18 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Special keys and buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b c d e f
OneKey Rescue system button a
When the computer is powered-off, press this button to start Lenovo OneKey Rescue system.
In Windows operating system, press this button to start Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 30. 19 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Cap Sensor buttons
b f Volume buttons
b d b c Mute/Unmute Volume down Volume up e d OneKey Theater button Lenovo OneKey Theater provides five scenario modes for using your computer in different ways: normal mode, movie mode, music mode, picture mode, and intelligent mode. These modes are preset enhancements by Lenovo to improve visual and aural experiences via your computer in different usage scenarios. You can manually choose between normal, movie and intelligent mode. Picture or music mode is automatically selected if your computer is in intelligent mode. To manually select a desired mode:
Press and release the OneKey Theater button to display the on-screen menu.
Keep pressing and releasing the button until the icon of your desired mode is highlighted. The computer switches to the selected mode after 2 seconds. Normal mode The default mode. Movie mode Provides enhanced visual and audio output. Music mode Provides enhanced audio output. Picture mode Provides enhanced contrast and color saturation. 20 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Intelligent mode Automatically switch your computer between movie, music, and picture mode according to the program that is running. Notes:
You can enable or disable the OneKey Theater feature via the Start menu. Some programs may not be compatible with intelligent mode. f Thermal management button The thermal management button can be used to switch the computer between different work modes and thus control the speed at which the heat dissipation fan spins. You can choose between standard, super silent, or efficient thermal dissipation mode. You can also activate the dust cleaning feature by pressing and releasing the thermal control button. Standard mode Standard mode is the factory default mode. It is the recommended work mode for most programs.
Super silent mode If your computer is not running large programs and you want a silent work environment, switch your computer to super silent mode. To switch to super silent mode, repeatedly press the thermal management button until highlighted. The computer will switch to super silent mode after three seconds. is Note: The heat dissipation fan spins at relatively low speeds in super silent mode, and thus dissipates less heat than in other modes. If large programs are running, the system may lower the voltage of the CPU (central processing unit) automatically to decrease the heat produced by the CPU. Consequently, you might experience lower system performance when the computer is running in super silent mode.
Efficient thermal dissipation mode If large programs are running, switch your computer to efficient thermal dissipation mode to allow more efficient thermal dissipation. To switch to efficient thermal dissipation mode, repeatedly press the thermal management button until is highlighted. 21 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Performing dust cleaning Dust tends to accumulate around the heat sink of the computers CPU over time, reducing the dissipation capability of the heat sink. You can reduce the amount of accumulated dust by performing dust cleaning. To perform dust cleaning, repeatedly press the thermal management button until highlighted. Dust cleaning will start after three seconds. When dust cleaning is activated, the heat dissipation fan spins at high and low speed alternatively to allow dust to be discharged. A complete dust cleaning process takes several minutes to complete. You can cancel the process at any time by switching the computer to standard, super silent or efficient thermal dissipation mode. Upon completion, the computer returns to the previous mode when dust cleaning was activated. is Note: We recommend you perform dust cleaning at least once a month to reduce the amount of dust accumulation around the heat sink. Place your computer in a clean environment with good ventilation when performing dust cleaning. 22 Chapter 2. Learning the basics System status indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
These indicators inform you of the computer status. a b c a b c Power status indicator Battery status indicator Caps lock indicator 23 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Securing your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This section provides information about how to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.
Attaching a security lock (not supplied) You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Refer to the Left-side view on page 4 for the location of the Kensington slot. Notes:
Before purchasing any security product, verify that it is compatible with this type of security keyhole. You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security features. Lenovo offers no comment judgement or warranty regarding the function, quality or performance of locking devices and security features.
Using VeriFace VeriFace is a face recognition software which takes a digital snapshot, extracts key features of your face, and creates a digital map that becomes the systems password. If you want to activate VeriFace for the first time, click the VeriFace icon on the desktop to register your facial image. Notes:
The face registration and verification works best in an environment with steady and even light. You can determine whether to use this function when you log on the system. For more details on VeriFace, see the software help. 24 Chapter 2. Learning the basics
Using passwords Using passwords helps prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a password and enable it, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. The computer cannot be used unless you enter the correct password. Note: This password can be from one to seven alphanumeric characters in any combination. For details about how to set the password, see the Help to the right of the screen in BIOS setup utility. Note: To enter BIOS setup utility, press F2 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up. 25 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet As a global network, the Internet connects computers worldwide, providing services such as e-mailing, information searching, electronic commerce, Web browsing and entertainment. You can connect the computer to the Internet in the following ways:
Wired connection: use physical wiring to connect. Wireless network technology: connect without wiring. Wired connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wired connections are a reliable and safe way to connect the computer to the Internet. Cable Cable Internet services use a cable modem connected to the residential cable TV line. DSL is a family of related technologies that bring high-
speed network access to homes and small businesses over ordinary telephone lines. DSL 26 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet
Hardware connection:
Cable DSL TV cable Telephone line Splitter *
Splitter *
Cable modem *
DSL modem *
* Not supplied. Note: The above diagrams are for reference only. Actual connection method may vary.
Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 27 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Wireless connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wireless connections provide mobile access to the Internet, allowing you to stay online anywhere the wireless signal covers. Divided by the signal scales, wireless connection to the Internet can be built based on the following standards. Wi-Fi WiMAX Wi-Fi networks cover a small physical area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings. An access point is necessary for the connection. WiMAX networks connect several Wireless LAN systems to cover a metropolitan area, providing high-
speed broadband access without the need for cables. Note: Your computer may not support all wireless connection methods. 28 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet
Using Wi-Fi/WiMAX (on select models) Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless communications, do the following:
1 Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Hardware connection Wi-Fi/WiMAX network
* Not supplied Access point *
Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and search Windows Help and Support Center for details on how to configure your computer. 29 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system OneKey Rescue system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Introduction The Lenovo OneKey Rescue system is an easy-to-use program that can be used to back up the data on your system partition (C drive) for easy restore when required. You can run Lenovo OneKey Recovery under the Windows operating system, and the OneKey Rescue system without starting the Windows operating system. Attention:
In order to utilize the features of the OneKey Rescue system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and OneKey Rescue system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons and is the reason the available disk space is less than it claims. The exact available hard disk space depends on the file size of the mirror image file (based on the size of operating system and preinstalled software).
Using Lenovo OneKey Recovery (within Windows operating system) In Windows operating system, double click the OneKey Recovery system Icon on the desktop to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Within the program, you can back up the system partition on the hard disk drive, other storage devices, or by creating recovery discs. Notes:
The backup process and creation of recovery discs may take some time, connect the AC adapter and battery pack to your computer. After the recovery discs are burned, please number them so that you can use them in the correct order. Computers without an integrated optical drive support the creation of recovery discs;
however an appropriate external optical drive is needed to physically create the recovery discs. For more instructions, see the Help file of Lenovo OneKey Recov-
ery. 30 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system
Using Lenovo OneKey Rescue system (without Windows operating system) In the event that the operating system cannot be loaded, follow the steps below to access OneKey Rescue system.
Shut down your computer.
Press the key to launch OneKey Rescue system. Within the program, you can choose to restore your system partition to the original factory status, or to a previously generated backup. Note: The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any critical data before using the recovery feature.
Creating a recovery disc(s) Your computer does not ship with a recovery disc. You can use Lenovo OneKey Recovery system to create a recovery disc(s), which can be used to start and restore your computer in case of a system failure. To create a recovery disc(s):
Insert a recordable disc into the optical drive on your computer. Note: If your computer does not come with an integrated optical drive or if the integrated optical drive does not support disc creating, connect an appropriate external optical drive to your computer.
In Windows, press the OneKey Rescue system button to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery system.
On the main screen, click Create Recovery Disc.
Choose the type of recovery disc(s). You can create three types of recovery disc(s): recovery disc(s) with existing backup image, recovery disc(s) from the current system partition, and factory default recovery disc(s). Select the type of recovery disc you want to create and follow the on-screen instructions.
Insert additional recordable disc(s) when prompted. 31 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system Notes:
The estimated number of discs needed will be displayed before the process of creating the recovery disc(s) begins. To minimize the number of discs needed, use recordable DVDs as the media. Also make sure your optical drive is compatible with the disc intended for use. After recovery disc creation, number the discs appropriately for use in their correct order. The first disc created will be used to start the computer in the case of a system failure. 32 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This section lists frequently asked questions and tells where you can find detailed answers. What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?
See Chapter 1. Important safety information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. How can I prevent problems with my computer?
See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. What are the main hardware features of my computer?
More information can be found in Chapter 1 and 2. Where can I find the detailed specifications for my computer?
See http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. I need to upgrade a device or I need to replace one of the following: the hard disk drive, memory, or the keyboard. See Appendix A. CRU instructions on page 40 of this guide. Where are the recovery discs?
Your computer did not come with a recovery disc. For an explanation of the alternative recovery methods offered by Lenovo, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 30. Where are the installation discs for preinstalled programs?
Installation discs for preinstalled programs are not supplied with Windows preinstalled computers. You can visit the Lenovo consumer support Web site to find all preinstalled software downloads. By default, you can find some installation backups for certain preinstalled software in the APP folder under the D driver. How can I contact the customer support center?
See " Chapter 3. Getting help and service" of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 33 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Where can I find warranty information?
For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. How can I install the device drivers?
A compatible device driver is a requirement to ensure correct operation and performance of each component in your computer. If your computer is pre-installed with an operating system, Lenovo provides all drivers that you need in your hard disk. What can I do if the backup process fails?
If you can start the backup feature without a problem, but it fails during the backup process, please try the following steps:
1 Close other programs, then restart the backup process. 2 Check if the destination media is damaged, try to select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to the factory status?
You can use this feature when your system fails or you need to re-install your operating system. This will restore your computer back to the initial status when you first booted up your computer after receiving it from the store. If there is critical data on your current partition, back it up before you run this recovery feature. 34 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
If you do not find your problem here, see Chapter 2. The following section only describes problems that might negate the need to refer to the more comprehensive information in Chapter 2. Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. My screen goes blank while the computer is on. If the screen is blank, make sure that:
- The battery is installed correctly.
- The AC adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.
- The computer power is on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.)
- The memory is installed correctly. If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to the original factory contents using OneKey Rescue system. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced. Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to exit from the screen saver or to resume from sleep or hibernation mode:
- Touch the touchpad.
- Press any key on the keyboard.
- Press the power button.
- Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the backlight for the LCD screen has been turned off. 35 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Password problems I forgot my password. Keyboard problems A number appears when you enter a letter (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485). If you forget your user password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password changed. If you forget your HDD password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. If you forget your supervisor password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. The numeric lock function is on. To disable it, press Fn + F8. Sleep or hibernation problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, or replace the battery with a fully charged one. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-
on self-test (POST). Make sure that:
- The battery is charged.
- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note:If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 36 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting The computer does not return from sleep mode and the com-
puter does not work. If the computer does not return from sleep mode, it may have entered hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the power indicator. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press any key or the power button. If your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press the power button to resume operation. Note: If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC adapter and the battery. Computer screen problems The screen is blank. Do the following:
- If you are using the AC adapter, or using the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press Fn + to make the screen brighter.
- If the power indicator is in blinking, press the power button to resume from the sleep mode.
- If the problem persist, follow the solution in the following problem The screen is unreadable or distorted.
- Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the LCD screen has been turned off. Make sure that:
- The display device driver is installed correctly.
- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.
- The monitor type is correct. Did you install the operating system or programs correctly?
If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Incorrect characters appear on the screen. 37 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the vol-
ume is turned up. Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indica-
tor shows empty.
-or-
Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery. Make sure that:
- The Mute function is off.
- The headphone jack is not used.
- Speakers are selected as the playback device. Discharge and recharge the battery. The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. A hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive does not work. In the Boot menu in BIOS setup utility, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot priority order correctly. A startup problem The Microsoft Windows oper-
ating system does not start. Use the OneKey Rescue system to help solve or identify your problem. For details about OneKey Rescue system, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 30. OneKey Rescue system problems Backup cannot be made. Fail to restore system partition to factory default. You are not currently using a Windows operating system. There is not enough space to store the backed up data. You will need to free more hard disk space on your system partition (C drive). The system partition, such as the partition size or the drive capacity of C, has been modified. 38 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Other problems Your computer does not respond. To turn off your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC adapter and the battery. Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. The computer does not start from a device you want. See the Boot menu of the BIOS setup utility. Make sure that the Boot priority order in the BIOS setup utility is set so that the computer starts from the device you want. Also make sure that the device from which the computer The connected external device does not work. starts is enabled. In the Boot menu in the BIOS setup utility, make sure that the device is included in the Boot priority order list. Press F12 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up to select the device you want the computer starts from. Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. When using a high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or system shut down may result. 39 Appendix A. CRU instructions Note:The illustrations used in this chapter are of the Lenovo IdeaPad Z380, unless otherwise stated. Replacing the battery pack - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Note: Use only the battery provided by Lenovo. Any other battery could ignite or explode. To replace the battery pack, do the following:
1 Turn off the computer, or enter hibernation mode. Disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3 Unlock the manual battery latch b
. Holding the spring-loaded battery a
, remove the battery pack in the direc-
latch in the unlocked position
. tion shown by the arrow c 1a c b 4 Install a fully charged battery pack. 5 Slide the manual battery latch to the locked position. 6 Turn the computer over and reconnect the AC adapter. 40 Appendix A. CRU instructions Replacing the hard disk drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
You can increase the storage capacity of your computer by replacing the hard disk drive with one of greater capacity. You can purchase a new hard disk drive from your reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Notes:
Replace the hard disk drive only if you upgrade it or have it repaired. The connectors and bay of the hard disk drive were not designed for frequent changes, or drive swapping. The preinstalled software are not included on an optional hard disk drive. Handling a hard disk drive Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the drive on a material, such as soft cloth, that absorbs the physical shock. Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive. Do not touch the connector. The drive is very sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and perma-
nent loss of data on the hard disk. Before removing the hard disk drive, make a backup copy of all the information on the hard disk, and then turn the com-
puter off. Never remove the drive while the system is operating, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. 41 Appendix A. CRU instructions To replace the hard disk drive, do the following:
1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display, and then turn the computer over. 3 Remove the battery pack. 4 Remove the Hard disk drive/Memory/Central processing unit/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. a.Loosen the screws that secure the compartment cover b.Remove the compartment cover b
. a
. b a 42 Appendix A. CRU instructions 5 Remove the frame fixing screws
. c c 6 Pull the tab in the direction shown by arrow d
. a.Hold the tab to lift the hard disk drive a little by arrow b.Pull the tab in the direction shown by arrow d
. d
. d 43 Appendix A. CRU instructions 7 Take out the hard disk drive secured in a metal frame e
. e 8 Remove the screws and detach the metal frame from the hard disk drive. 9 Attach the metal frame to a new hard disk drive and tighten the screws. 0 Put the hard disk drive gently into the hard disk drive bay with the tab facing upwards and the connectors facing each other; then push it firmly into space. A Reinstall the frame fixing screw. B Reinstall the compartment cover and tighten the screws. C Reinstall the battery pack. D Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. 44 Appendix A. CRU instructions Replacing memory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a double-data-rate three synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3 SDRAM)-available as an option-in the memory slot of your computer. DDR3 SDRAMs are available in various capacities. Note: Use only the memory types supported by your computer. If you incorrectly install optional memory, or install an unsupported memory type, a warning beep will sound when you try to start the computer. To install a DDR3 SDRAM, do the following:
1 Touch a metal table or a grounded metal object to reduce any static electricity in your body, which could damage the DDR3 SDRAM. Do not touch the contact edge of the DDR3 SDRAM. 2 Turn off the computer. Disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 3 Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 4 Remove the battery again. 5 Remove the Hard disk drive/Memory/Central processing unit/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. a.Loosen the screws that secure the compartment cover b.Remove the compartment cover b
. a
. b a 45 Appendix A. CRU instructions 6 If two DDR3 SDRAMs are already installed in the memory slot, remove one of them to make room for the new one by pressing out on the latches on both edges of the socket at the same time. Be sure to save the old DDR3 SDRAM for future use. b a a 7 Align the notch of the DDR3 SDRAM with the protrusion of the socket and gently insert the DDR3 SDRAM into the socket at a 30-45 angle. 8 Push the DDR3 SDRAM inward toward the socket until the latches on both edges of the socket are pushed into the closed position. b a 9 After aligning the attachment clips with their matching gaps, reinstall the compartment cover. 0 Reinstall and tighten the screws. A Reinstall the battery. B Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. 46 Appendix A. CRU instructions Note: If only one DDR3 SDRAM is used on the computer you are servicing, the card must be installed in SLOT-0 (
: lower slot), but not in SLOT-1 (
: upper slot). b a To make sure that the DDR3 SDRAM is installed correctly, do as follows:
1 Turn the computer on. 2 Hold F2 during startup. The BIOS setup utility screen opens. The Total Memory item shows the total amount of memory installed in your computer. 47 Appendix A. CRU instructions Removing the optical drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
To remove the optical drive, do the following:
1 Remove the Hard disk drive/Memory/Central processing unit/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. 2 Remove the screw shown in the illustration 3 Gently pull the optical drive out b
. a
. a b 48 Appendix A. CRU instructions The following table provides a list of CRUs for your computer, and informs you of where to find replacement instructions. Setup Poster User Guide AC adapter Power cord for AC adapter Battery pack Bottom access doors Hard disk drive Memory Optical drive O O O O O O O O 49 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo IdeaPad OneKey VeriFace Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. NVIDIA and Optimus are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the United States and other countries. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. Premium Surround Sound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS Premium Surround Sound provides the ultimate audio experience for music, movies and games on the PC. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 50 IMPORTANT NOTE:
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Radiation Exposure StatementThis EUT is compliance with SAR for general population/uncontrolled exposure limits in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1999 and had been tested in accordance with the measurement methods and procedures specified in OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C. FCC Caution:
1. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules/Industry Canada RSS 210 standard . Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 3. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user authority to operate the equipment. Industry Canada Caution This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'IndustrieCanadaapplicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This device complies with the exemption from the routine evaluation limits in Section 2.5 of RSS 102. Dclaration IC d'exposition aux radiations:
Cet appareil est conforme avec l'exemption des limites d'valuation courante dans la section 2.5 du RSS 102. IdeaPad Z380/Z480/
Z485/Z580/Z585 User Guide V1.0 New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com L e n o v o C h n a 2 0 1 1 i V1.0_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer.
various | user manual 2 | Users Manual | 333.16 KiB | December 04 2012 |
Lenovo limited warranty L505-0010-01 04/2008 P/N: XXXXXXXXX Printed in China This Lenovo Limited Warranty applies only to Lenovo branded hardware products you purchased for your own use and not for resale. This Lenovo Limited Warranty is available in other languages at www.lenovo.com/warranty.
What this warranty covers Lenovo warrants that each hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase specified on your sales receipt or invoice unless Lenovo informs you otherwise in writing. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are designated below under the section titled Warranty information. THIS WARRANTY IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY LAW AND ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION ON DURATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
How to obtain warranty service If the product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, you may obtain warranty service by contacting Lenovo or an approved service provider. Each of them is referred to as a Service Provider. A list of Service Providers and their telephone numbers is available at www.lenovo.com/support/phone. 1 Lenovo limited warranty Warranty service may not be available in all locations and may differ from location to location. Charges may apply outside a Service Providers normal service area. Contact a local Service Provider for location-specific information.
What your service provider will do to correct problems When you contact a Service Provider, you must follow the problem determination and resolution procedures specified. Your Service Provider will attempt to diagnose and resolve your problem over the telephone, e-mail or through remote assistance. Your Service Provider may direct you to download and install designated software updates. Some problems can be resolved with a replacement part that you can install yourself called a Customer Replaceable Unit or CRU. If so, your Service Provider will ship the CRU to you to install. If your problem cannot be resolved over the telephone or remotely, through your application of software updates or the installation of a CRU by you, your Service Provider will arrange for service under the type of warranty service designated for the product under the section titled Warranty information. If your Service Provider determines that it is unable to repair your product, your Service Provider will replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent. If your Service Provider determines that it is unable to either repair or replace your product, your sole remedy is to return the product to your place of purchase or to Lenovo for a refund of your purchase price.
Replacement of a product or part When the warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovos property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. Before your Service Provider replaces a product or part, you agree to:
2 Lenovo limited warranty 1 remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not under warranty service;
2 ensure that the product or part is free of any legal obligations or restrictions that prevent its replacement; and 3 obtain authorization from the owner to have your Service Provider service a product or part if you do not own it.
Your additional responsibilities Where applicable, before service is provided, you agree to:
1 follow the service request procedures that your Service Provider specifies;
2 backup or secure all programs and data contained in the product;
3 provide your Service Provider with all system keys or passwords and sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to perform service; and 4 ensure that all information about identified or identifiable individuals
(Personal Data) is deleted from the product or that, with respect to any Personal Data that you did not delete, you are in compliance with all applicable laws.
Use of personal information If you obtain service under this warranty, Lenovo will store, use and process information about your warranty service and your contact information, including name, phone numbers, address, and e-mail address. Lenovo will use this information to perform service under this warranty and to improve our business relationship with you. We may contact you to inquire about your satisfaction regarding our warranty service or to notify you about any product recalls or safety issues. In accomplishing these purposes, we may transfer your information to any country where we do business and may provide it to entities acting on our behalf. We may also disclose it where required by law.
What this warranty does not cover This warranty does not cover the following:
uninterrupted or error-free operation of a product;
loss of, or damage to, your data;
any software programs, whether provided with the product or installed subsequently;
3 Lenovo limited warranty
failure or damage resulting from misuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, natural disasters, power surges, or improper maintenance by you;
damage caused by a non-authorized service provider;
failure of, or damage caused by, any third party products, including those that Lenovo may provide or integrate into the Lenovo product at your request; and
any technical or other support, such as assistance with how-to questions and those regarding product set-up and installation. This warranty is voided by removal or alteration of identification labels on the product or its parts.
Limitation of liability Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is: 1) in your Service Providers possession; or 2) in transit in those cases where the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor your Service Provider is responsible for any of your data including confidential, proprietary, or personal data contained in a product. You should remove and/or backup all such information from the product prior to its service or return. Circumstances may arise where, because of a default on Lenovos part or other liability, you may be entitled to recover damages from Lenovo. In each such instance, regardless of the basis of your claim against Lenovo (including breach, negligence, misrepresentation, or other contract or tort claim), except and to the extent that liability cannot be waived or limited by applicable laws, Lenovo shall not be liable for more than the amount of actual direct damages suffered by you, up to the amount you paid for the product. This limit does not apply to damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lenovo is liable under law. This limit also applies to Lenovos suppliers, resellers, and your Service Provider. It is the maximum amount for which Lenovo, its suppliers, resellers, and your Service Provider are collectively responsible. 4 Lenovo limited warranty UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL LENOVO, ITS SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS OR DAMAGE TO YOUR DATA; OR 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Dispute resolution If you acquired the product in Cambodia, Indonesia, Philippines, Vietnam or Sri Lanka, disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Singapore and this warranty shall be governed, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of Singapore, without regard to conflict of laws. If you acquired the product in India, disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Bangalore, India. Arbitration in Singapore shall be held in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of Singapore International Arbitration Center (SIAC Rules) then in effect. Arbitration in India shall be held in accordance with the laws of India then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding on the parties without appeal. Any award shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. All arbitration proceedings, including all documents presented in such proceedings, shall be conducted in the English language, and the English language version of this warranty prevails over any other language version in such proceedings.
Other rights THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE OR JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER APPLICABLE LAW OR WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LENOVO. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS, INCLUDING RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS UNDER NATIONAL LEGISLATION GOVERNING THE SALE OF CONSUMER GOODS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. 5 Lenovo limited warranty
European Economic Area (EEA) Customers in the EEA may contact Lenovo at the following address: EMEA Service Organisation, Lenovo (International) B.V., Floor 2, Einsteinova 21, 851 01, Bratislava, Slovakia. Service under this warranty for Lenovo hardware products purchased in EEA countries may be obtained in any EEA country in which the product has been announced and made available by Lenovo. 6 Lenovo limited warranty Warranty information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period Types of warranty service 1, 2 1, 3, 4 3, 4 Notebook:
20133, 2129 20134, 2148 20151, 2616 20135, 2151 20152, 2617 India Singapore Taiwan, Korea China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), China
(Macau S.A.R.), Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Vietnam, Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, SaudiArabia, UAE, Egypt, Algeria, Nigeria, Kenya, South Africa Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Cyprus, Estonia, Greece, Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania, Slovenia United States of America, Canada, Mexico, Argentina, Colombia, Peru, Venezuela, Bolivia, Uruguay, Chile, Paraguay, Ecuador Australia, New Zealand, Japan, Austria, Belgium, Denmark, France, Finland, Germany, Iceland, Israel, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, the United Kingdom Russia, Ukraine, the Republic of Kazakhstan, Belarus, Sri Lanka, Turkmenistan, Brazil Poland, Turkey, Czech Republic, Hungary, Slovakia, Bulgaria 1, 4 1, 3 4 1, 4 parts and labor -
1 year battery pack -
1 year parts and labor -
2 years battery pack -
1 year If required, your Service Provider will provide repair or exchange service depending on the type of warranty service specified for your product and the available service. Scheduling of service will depend upon the time of your call, parts availability, and other factors.
Types of warranty service 1 Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) Service 7 Lenovo limited warranty Under CRU Service, your Service Provider will ship CRUs to you for installation by you. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your product and are available from Lenovo at any time upon request. CRUs that are easily installed by you are called Self-service CRUs, while Optional-service CRUs may require some technical skill and tools. Installation of Self-service CRUs is your responsibility. You may request that a Service Provider install Optional-service CRUs under one of the other types of warranty service designated for your product. An optional service offering may be available for purchase from Lenovo to have Lenovo install Self-service CRUs for you. You may find a list of CRUs and their designation in the publication that ships with your product or at www.lenovo.com/
CRUs. The requirement to return a defective CRU, if any, will be specified in the materials shipped with a replacement CRU. When return is required: 1) return instructions, a prepaid return shipping label, and a container will be included with the replacement CRU; and 2) you may be charged for the replacement CRU if your Service Provider does not receive the defective CRU within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement. 2 On-site Service Under On-Site Service, your Service Provider will either repair or exchange the product at your location. You must provide a suitable working area to allow disassembly and reassembly of the Lenovo product. For some products, certain repairs may require your Service Provider to send the product to a designated service center. 3 Courier or Depot Service Under Courier or Depot Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center, with shipping arranged by your Service Provider. You are responsible for disconnecting the product. A shipping container will be provided to you for you to return your product to a designated service center. A courier will pick up your product and deliver it to the designated service center. Following its repair or exchange, the service center will arrange the return delivery of the product to you. 8 Lenovo limited warranty 4 Customer Carry-In or Mail-In Service Under Customer Carry-In or Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center, with delivery or shipping arranged by you. You are responsible to deliver or mail, as your Service Provider specifies, (prepaid by you unless specified otherwise) the product, suitably packaged to a designated location. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available for your collection. Failure to collect the product may result in your Service Provider disposing of the product as it sees fit. For Mail-in Service, the product will be returned to you at Lenovos expense, unless your Service Provider specifies otherwise. 5 Product Exchange Service Under Product Exchange Service, Lenovo will ship a replacement product to your location. You are responsible for its installation and verification of its operation. The replacement product becomes your property in exchange for the failed product, which becomes the property of Lenovo. You must pack the failed product in the shipping carton used to ship the replacement product and return it to Lenovo. Transportation charges, both ways, are paid by Lenovo. Failure to use the carton in which the replacement product was received may result in your responsibility for damage to the failed product during shipment. You may be charged for the replacement product if Lenovo does not receive the failed product within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement product. 9 Product specific Notices The notices in this appendix are specific to the products with the given MT numbers. Notices that are common for most Lenovo products are included in Appendix A. Notices of the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Energy star information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if the ENERGY STAR mark is affixed, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR 5.0 program requirements for computers.
20133, 2129
20134, 2148
20151, 2616
20135, 2151
20152, 2617 By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power-management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, visit http://www.energystar.gov. Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when your computer has been inactive for a specified duration:
10 Product specific Notices Table 1. ENERGY STAR power-management features Windows 7 Power plan: Energy Star
Turn off the display:
After 10 minutes
Put the computer to sleep:
After 25 minutes
Advanced power settings:
- Turn off hard disks:
After 20 minutes
- Hibernate: After 1 hour To awaken your computer from a Sleep mode, press any key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, refer to your Windows Help and Support information system. Electronic emissions notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The following information refers to Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485/Z580/
Z585, machine type 20133, 2129 / 20134, 2148 / 20151, 2616 / 20135, 2151 /
20152, 2617.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 11 Product specific Notices
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible party:
Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Telephone: (919) 294-5900
Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
German Class B Compliance Statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:
Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit 12 Product specific Notices Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/
108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. Deutschland:
Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmittein Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (frher 89/336/EWG), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo
(Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B. 13 Product specific Notices
European Union Compliance Statement Class B Compliance European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-
recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Such cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors. 14 Specifications Model Name: Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485/Z580/Z585 Machine Type: 20133, 2129 / 20134, 2148 / 20151, 2616 / 20135, 2151 / 20152, 2617 Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Platform Platform Memory Type and speed Maximum supported capacity Slots Hard disk drive Form factor Interface Optical drive Form factor Type Appr. 328 mm 222 mm 20~30.8 mm (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380) Appr. 341 mm 232 mm 20~32.4 mm
(Lenovo IdeaPad Z480/Z485) Appr. 376mm 250mm 20~32.9mm (Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585) Appr. 2.1 kg with 6 cell battery (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380) Appr. 2.3 kg with 6 cell battery (Lenovo IdeaPad Z480/Z485) Appr. 2.65 kg with 6 cell battery (Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585) 13.3-inch (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380) 14-inch (Lenovo IdeaPad Z480/Z485) 15.6-inch (Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585) Intel Chief River Intel Sandy bridge DDR3 1600 8 GB SODIMM 2 2.5-inch, 9.5 mm or 2.5-inch, 7.0 mm SATA III 12.7 mm Rambo or Blueray combo 15 Specifications Display Display resolution
(LCD) Maximum display resolution on external display device LCD backlight I/O Ports USB Audio Communication Video/Audio Video Card reader Battery pack Type Cells/Capacity AC adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera Security 16 1,366 768 pixels 2,048 1,536 pixels LED 1x USB 2.0, 2x USB3.0 (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380) 2x USB 2.0, 2x USB 3.0 (Lenovo IdeaPad Z480/Z485/Z580/Z585) Headphone jack 1, Mic-in jack 1 RJ-45 1 HDMI 1 VGA 1 5 in 1 slot 1 (SD/MMC/MS/MS pro/XD)
(Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485) 5in1 slot 1 (SD/SD pro/MMC/MS pro/XD)
(Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585) Lithium-ion 6 cell, 2200mAh 100 - 240 V, 50 - 60 Hz AC 20 V DC 65 W or 90 W 0.3 mega HD (1.0 mega) pixels Kensington slot 1 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo IdeaPad OneKey VeriFace Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. NVIDIA and Optimus are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the United States and other countries. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. Premium Surround Sound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS Premium Surround Sound provides the ultimate audio experience for music, movies and games on the PC. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 17
various | Host Label | ID Label/Location Info | 72.42 KiB |
Trade Mark: Lenovo Model No.: 20191XXXX ;
4941XXXX(X=0-9,A-Z) Contains: FCC ID: QDS--BRCM1050I Contains: IC ID: 4324A-BRCM1050 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
various | ID label/Location info | ID Label/Location Info | 172.84 KiB | December 04 2012 |
PROPOSED FCC, IC, NCC LABEL FOR HOST DEVICE CONTAINS BROADCOM BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 CCXXxxLPyyyZz
various | ID label/Location info rev | ID Label/Location Info | 162.86 KiB |
PROPOSED FCC, IC, NCC LABEL FOR HOST DEVICE CONTAINS BROADCOM BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 CCXXxxLPyyyZz
various | LABEL | ID Label/Location Info | 61.09 KiB | July 03 2012 |
003WWA10 003GZA101 Lr] ar 1186003 Secale 011 12 FC FCC ID : QDS-BRCM1050!
IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 TRA registered number:
0017762/09 Dealer No: 0030000/10 MOC: 91-21927 AANAATELL 2429-09-1869 G N12075 COFETEL N RCPBRBCO9-1196 Que OLP4160T6 Oy CMIIT ID: 2009DJ4985 ww NTC Ons
- CNC: C-78 BCM-BCM94313HMG2L 81 Type Accepted ESD-0904359C
various | Label Info | ID Label/Location Info | 102.14 KiB | February 04 2012 |
China 40W IdeaPad Y580
S/N:
MO:
P/N:
Contains Transmitter Module:
Contains Transmitter Module:
FCC ID:VQF-RT3090-1T1R FCC ID:QDS-BRCM1050I IC :7542A-RT30901T1R IC :4324A-BRCM1050
IdeaPad Y580 Lenovo IdeaPad S200 20132 Model Name(:20153 INPUT/:20V 2A Factory ID:F4 S/N: MO:
P/N: Mfg Date:YY/MM/DD Manufactured for Lenovo
Made in China Contains Transmitter Module:
Contains Transmitter Module:
FCC ID:VQF-RT3090-1T1R FCC ID:QDS-BRCM1050I IC :7542A-RT30901T1R IC :4324A-BRCM1050
IdeaPad Y480 Lenovo IdeaPad S200 2099 Model Name(:2634 INPUT/:20V 2A Factory ID:F4 S/N: MO:
P/N: Mfg Date:YY/MM/DD Manufactured for Lenovo
Made in China Back of the EUT label location
various | Label Sample | ID Label/Location Info | 31.77 KiB | December 07 2012 |
PROPOSED FCC, IC, NCC LABEL FOR HOST DEVICE CONTAINS BROADCOM BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 CCXXxxLPyyyZz
various | Agent authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 62.62 KiB | September 05 2013 |
fl BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place BROADCOM. Sunnyvale, CA 94806 me, SL gg areca R Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: May 21, 2012 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 47173 Benicia Street Fremont, CA 94538, USA To whom it may concern:
I, the undersigned, hereby authorize Ms. Claire Hoque/Application Examiner of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf in ail manners relating to application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Ms. Claire Hoque of CCS on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own.
|, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing CCS as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:
a) comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;
b) make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;
c) make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has been granted;
d) do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;
e) upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;
f) use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with specified standards;
i g) endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a misleading manner;
h) ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;
i) keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the product's compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;
j)) take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;
k) document the actions taken. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours,
(C~
Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Systems Operations Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086 Broadcom Corporation * 190 Mathilda Place + Sunnyvale, California 94086 + Phone: 408-543-3000 + FAX: 408-543-3399
various | C2PC request letter | Cover Letter(s) | 50.85 KiB | September 05 2013 |
f\ BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place BROADCOM. Sunnyvale, CA 94806 ey 1 gg aera NG, Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: May 6, 2013 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM10501
(Original Grant Date: 09/21/2010) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM 10501. There are no hardware or electrical modifications made to the applying modular transmitter. The major change filed under this application is:
Change #1 Adding a dipole antenna type model LO1RF005-R with peak gain of 2.71 dBi /2.4 GHz anda monopole antenna type model L01RF031-DT-R with peak gain of 2.51 dBi/2.4 GHz i If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincer S, Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Systems Operations |
Broadcom Corporation i 190 Mathilda Place, Sunnyvale, CA 94086 i
various | Request for confidentiality | Cover Letter(s) | 65.44 KiB | September 05 2013 |
Date: April 12, 2013 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: QDS-BRCM10501 To Whom It May Concern:
Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential documents from public disclosure indefinitely Antenna specifications Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description which are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In addition to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices, we are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments for 180 days. Test Setup Photos It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Systems Operations Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086 i i
various | Authorization letter | Cover Letter(s) | 100.25 KiB |
775 Montague Expressway Milpitas, CA 95035 Tel: 408-526-1188 Fax: 408-526-1088 Email: TCB@siemic.com Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Reason for Amendment (current / obsolete) Initial Release (obsolete) Revised wording (obsolete) Updated company template (current) Revision History From 1.0 1.0 2.0 To 1.0 2.0 3.0 Approved Date Nov-14-2006 Sept25-2007 Jan-31-2012 SCS-F18: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Page 1 of 2 Rev 3.0 Broadcom Corporation 2012/07/16 To: SIEMIC, INC. 775 Montague Expressway, Milpitas, CA 95035 USA Dear Sir/Madam, Re: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter We, Broadcom Corporation hereby authorize SIEMIC, INC. to act as a Certification Body for certifying for the following project(s):
Product Name: 802.11g/DRAFT 802.11n WIRELESS LAN PCI-E MINICARD Model Name: BCM94313HMG2L We affirm that between SIEMIC and Broadcom Corporation, any difference in understanding, including test plan, measurement methods, applicable standards and relevant procedures and processes have been resolved prior to commencement of testing activities. Sincerely, Miro Chueh/ Manager Cerpass Technology (Suzhou) Co.,Ltd
/ No.66,Tangzhuang Road, Suzhou Industrial Park, Jiangsu 215006, China SCS-F18: Project and Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter Page 2 of 2 Rev 3.0
various | C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 110.18 KiB |
775 Montague Expressway Milpitas, CA 95035 Tel: 408-526-1188 Fax: 408-526-1088 Email: TCB@siemic.com FCC CLASS II PERMISSIVE CHANGE REQUEST LETTER Reason for Amendment (current / obsolete) Initial Release (current) Revision History From 1.0 To 1.0 Approved Date Feb-20-2012 SCS-F159 FCC Class II Permissive Change Request Letter Page 1 of 3 Rev. 1.0 Broadcom Corporation FCC Class II Permissive Change Request Letter Date: 2012/07/16 To FCC:
RE: FCC Permissive II Change Request for Company: Broadcom Corporation FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I We are submitting an application for a class II permissive change to the FCC approval of the Company name:
Broadcom Corporation, product description: 802.11g/DRAFT 802.11n WIRELESS LAN PCI-E MINICARD (FCC:
QDS-BRCM1050I, Original Grant Date: 09/21/2010). The transmitter module (contains antenna spec) itself has no changed. Here are the changes:
Modification:
1. This Module is restricted only on the platform the Notebook(Model number: 20191XXXX ;
4941XXXX(X=0-9,A-Z)) This platform device is a portable host (Notebook) 2. SAR evaluation test report was submitted. There is no change in hardware or in existing RF relevant portion. Sincerely, Miro Chueh/ Manager Cerpass Technology (Suzhou) Co.,Ltd
/ No.66,Tangzhuang Road, Suzhou Industrial Park, Jiangsu 215006, China SCS-F159 FCC Class II Permissive Change Request Letter Page 2 of 3 Rev. 1.0 SCS-F159 FCC Class II Permissive Change Request Letter Page 3 of 3 Rev. 1.0
various | Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 20.67 KiB |
fl BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place BROADCOM. Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: August 14, 2012 Cerpass Technology (Suzhou) Co.,Ltd. (Cerpass) No.66,Tangzhuang Road, Suzhou Industrial Park, Suzhou Jiangsu 215006, China, Contact: Miro Chueh / Manager To whom it may concern:
We, Broadcom Corporation, acknowledge that Cerpass will do the SAR testing and file Class II permissive changes to the FCC and IC for the following product. 1. Product Description: 802.11gn WLAN PCI-E Mini Card Model: BCM94313HMG2L FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I IC: 4324A-BRCM1050 We hereby authorize Cerpass to act on our behalf in manners relating to the FCC and IC Class II applications, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering Systems Operations Broadcom Corporation
various | confidential Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 51.88 KiB |
Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place, Sunnyvale CA 94086, U.S.A. Tel.: 408-543-3300 Date: 2012/08/16 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Equipment Authorization Division 7345 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, Maryland 21046 Subject: Confidentiality Request for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I Gentlemen:
Short-term The form 731 and application have been electronically submitted and any attachments will be up loaded to your web site to be used in obtaining a grant of certification. Pursuant to DA 04-1705 of the Commissions pubic notice, we request short-term confidential treatment for the following information until 180 days after the Grant Date of Equipment Authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information remains confidential until the actual marketing of the device:
1. External Photos 2. Internal Photos 3. Test Setup Photos 4. Users Manual Permanent Broadcom Corporation requests that the material in the following files be requests that the material in the following files be requests that the material in the following files be withheld from public disclosure in accordance with Section 0.459 of the withheld from public disclosure in accordance with Section 0.459 of the withheld from public disclosure in accordance with Section 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, 47 C.F.R. 0.459, following grant of the application. Commissions Rules, 47 C.F.R. 0.459, following grant of the application. Commissions Rules, 47 C.F.R. 0.459, following grant of the application. 1. Block Diagram 2. Circuit Diagram Should you require any further information, please contact the undersigned. Should you require any furt her information, please contact the undersigned. Thank you for your consideration in this matter. Thank you for your consideration in this matter. s company name: Broadcom Corporation s company Address: 190 Mathilda Place, Sunnyvale CA 94086 190 Mathilda Place, Sunnyvale CA 94086, U.S.A. Sincerely, Applicants company name:
Applicants company Address:
Miro chuen Signature :
Job Title and Dept.: Manager, Engineering Manager, Engineering E-Mail : Miroc@cerpass.net Miroc@cerpass.net 0512-69175888 Tel. : 0512
various | Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 26.47 KiB | December 07 2012 |
Date: July 2, 2012 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM10501
(Original Grant date: 09/21/2010) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCMI0S50I. There are no hardware or electrical modifications made to the applying modular transmitter itself. The major change filed under this application:
Change #1 Adding a portable platform, Dell P17G. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, We ~_ Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Systems Operations Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
various | Class 2 Permissive Change letter | Cover Letter(s) | 44.55 KiB | December 04 2012 |
BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: March 26, 2012 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept.
(Original Grant Date: 9/21/2010) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I. There are no hardware or electrical modification made to the applying modular transmitter. The major changes filed under this application are:
The operation Frequency is 2412MHz~2462MHz. Change: Add portable Condition compliance to the grant so that the module may be used in qualified host PC(s) and implementation of module-notebook authentication. Product name:Notebook Computer / Brand name:lenovo Model: 20151, 2616, Lenovo IdeaPad Z485 The Above model numbers have the same specifications. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Rex Liao Section Manager Compliance Certification Services Inc. NO. 989-1 Wen Shan Rd., Shang Shan Village, Qionglin Shiang Hsinchu County, Taiwan
various | declaration of authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 38.32 KiB | December 04 2012 |
RF_160, Issue 03 Declaration of Authorization We Name: Compliance Certification Services Inc. Address: NO. 989-1 Wen Shan Rd., Shang Shan Village, City: Qionglin Shiang,Hsinchu County Country: Taiwan Declare that:
Name Representative of agent: Kelly Tsai Agent Company name: Compliance Certification Services Inc. Address: NO. 989-1 Wen Shan Rd., Shang Shan Village,Qionglin Shiang, City: Hsinchu County 30741 Country Taiwan, R.O.C is authorized to apply for Certification of the following product(s):
Product description: 802.11g/DRAFT 802.11n WIRELESS LAN PCI-E MINICARD Type designation: BCM94313HMG2L Trademark: Broadcom FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I IC:4324A-BRCM1050 on our behalf. Date: March 26, 2012 Signature: . Name/Title: Rex Liao / Section Manager Company Name: Compliance Certification Services Inc. Notes:
(1): Required for FCC application
(2): For FCC it must be the Grantee Code owner or the authorized agent.
various | Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 35.13 KiB | June 04 2012 / December 04 2012 |
Date: February 17, 2012 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 c.c. Compliance Certification Services No. 989-1 Wenshan Rd., Shang Shan Village, Qionglin Shiang, Hsinchu County 30741, Taiwan To whom it may concern:
I, the undersigned, hereby authorize Mr. Rex Liao / Section Manager of Compliance Certification Services Inc. and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Mr. Rex Lai / Section Manager of Compliance Certification Services Inc. on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;
I, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing CCS as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:
a) make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision b) for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;
c) been granted;
d) into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;
e) that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;
f) specified standards;
g) misleading manner;
use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has document the actions taken. keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the products take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as h) documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;
i) compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;
j) products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;
k) This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
various | Class II Change Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 28.81 KiB | February 04 2012 |
A BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place BROAD COM. Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: March 1, 2012 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050!
(Original Grant Date: 9/21/2010) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I. There are no hardware or electrical modifications made to the applying modular transmitter. i
The major changes filed under this application are:
1. Change: The product BCM94313HMG2L will be installed in the following models of notebooks/laptops:
Model: IdeaPad Y480xxxx;2013 1xxxx;2093xxxx(x can be 0-9, a-z, A-Z, -or blank) 2. Change: The product BCM94313HMG2L will be installed in the following models of notebooks/laptops:
Model: IdeaPad Y580xxxx;20132xxxx;2099xxxx(x can be 0-9, a-z, A-Z, -or blank) Ifyou have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yeur, Haniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
various | LOA letter | Cover Letter(s) | 30.17 KiB |
Date: February 17, 2012 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 c.c. Compliance Certification Services No. 989-1 Wenshan Rd., Shang Shan Village, Qionglin Shiang, Hsinchu County 30741, Taiwan To whom it may concern:
I, the undersigned, hereby authorize Mr. Rex Liao / Section Manager of Compliance Certification Services Inc. and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Mr. Rex Lai / Section Manager of Compliance Certification Services Inc. on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. I, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing CCS as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:
a) comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;
b) make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;
c) been granted;
make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division d) into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;
upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter e) that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;
use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a f) specified standards;
g) misleading manner;
h) documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;
ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the products i) compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;
j) products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;
take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in k) document the actions taken. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
various | CONFIDENTIAL REQUEST LETTER | Cover Letter(s) | 181.16 KiB | July 03 2012 |
Compliance Certification Services BEBRRHERAG SUSE Ze OB] New Taipei City 24891, Taiwan (R.O.C) Compliance Certification Services Inc. lj Phone: +886-2-22999720 Fax: +886-2-22999721 Feb. 08, 2012 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division FCC ID: QDS-BRCM10501 Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, the applicant hereby requests confidential treatment of information applied this application as outlined below:
1. Block Diagram 2. Circuit Diagram The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application Sincerely, Signature Rex Lai Section Manager Compliance Certification Services
various | Confidentiality request | Cover Letter(s) | 31.37 KiB | January 03 2012 |
BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 QDS-BRCM1050I Request for Confidentiality Date: February 23, 2012 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject:
FCC ID:
To Whom It May Concern:
Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential documents from public disclosure indefinitely 2-way Bios Lock Logic-Theory of Operation Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description which are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
various | Permissive change letter | Cover Letter(s) | 28.76 KiB | January 03 2012 |
BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: February 17, 2012 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept.
(Original Grant Date: 09/21/2010) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1050I. There are no hardware or electrical modifications made to the applying modular transmitter. The major change filed under this application is:
1. Change: Implementing a 2- way authentication/ Bios Lock functions to allow for user installable capability in all notebook platforms. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
various | CCS Authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 115.51 KiB |
Date: March 20, 2007 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 561F Monterey Road Morgan Hill, CA 95037 To whom it may concern:
We, the undersigned, hereby authorize the Testing Division of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf solely with regards to the Certification (as defined below);
provided, however, CCS will not provide for any payments beyond published Corporate Contract between CCS and Broadcom without our prior written consent. Certification means only the following actions: Test and issue reports for our products upon request; sign FCC, IC and CAB application forms relating to our products on our behalf; pay certification fees on our behalf; submit FCC, IC and ETSI test reports and product documents for product approval; and answer questions from certification review on our behalf. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing CCS Testing Division as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:
a)
(individual Regulatory Authority requirements pertaining to Equipment Authorization);
b) provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;
c) certification has been granted;
d) Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;
e) matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;
upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which comply with the the relevant provisions of the certification program use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a f) with specified standards;
g) misleading manner;
h) ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division, which are governed by individual Regulatory Authority requirements;
i) keep a record of all complaints made known to us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;
j) found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;
k) This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies document the actions taken. Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
various | Confid Request | Cover Letter(s) | 32.50 KiB |
* Date: September 17, 2010 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: QDS-BRCM10501 To Whom It May Concern:
Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely Schematics Block Diagram Operational Description Antenna report Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments until 03/15/2011. Setup Photos External photos Internal photos OEM Installation Guide It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best ar a Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
various | Modular Approval Request | Cover Letter(s) | 22.40 KiB |
Applicant/Grantee FCC ID:
Broadcom Corporation QDS-BRCM1050I Request for Modular Approval Request for Limited Modular Approval Requirements EUT Conditions Comply (Y/N) Section 15.212 Modular Transmitters Single Modular Approval Requirements Refer to external photos. Shield is over the radio circuit module. Y All inputs to the modules are buffered through logic or microprocessor inputs. Refer to Schematics. Internal 3.3V power regulator. Refer to schematics. Module contains a hirose connector. The module will go inside final product where the antenna(s) will be integral to the end product, which can be considered permanently attached. Y Y Y Module was tested outside. Refer to test setup photos in test report. Y 1 2 3 4 5 The radio elements of the modular transmitter must have their own shielding. The physical crystal and tuning capacitors may be located external to the shielded radio elements. The modular transmitter must have buffered modulation/data inputs (if such inputs are provided) to ensure that the module will comply with Part 15 requirements under conditions of excessive data rates or over-modulation. The modular transmitter must have its own power supply regulation. The modular transmitter must comply with the antenna and transmission system requirements of Sections 15.203, 15.204(b) and 15.204(c). The antenna must either be permanently attached or employ a unique antenna coupler (at all connections between the module and the antenna, including the cable). The professional installation provision of Section 15.203 is not applicable to modules but can apply to limited modular approvals under paragraph (b) of this section. The modular transmitter must be tested in a stand-alone configuration, i.e., the module must not be inside another device during testing for compliance with Part 15 requirements. Unless the transmitter module will be battery powered, it must comply with the AC line conducted requirements found in Section 15.207. AC or DC power lines and data input/output lines connected to the module must not contain ferrites, unless they will be marketed with the module (see Section 15.27(a)). The length of these lines shall be the length typical of actual use or, if that length is unknown, at least 10 centimeters to insure that there is no coupling between the case of the module and supporting 6 Refer to label provided. Y equipment. Any accessories, peripherals, or support equipment connected to the module during testing shall be unmodified and commercially available
(see Section 15.31(i)). The modular transmitter must be equipped with either a permanently affixed label or must be capable of electronically displaying its FCC identification number.
(A) If using a permanently affixed label, the modular transmitter must be labeled with its own FCC identification number, and, if the FCC identification number is not visible when the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as the following: Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: XYZMODEL1 or Contains FCC ID:
XYZMODEL1. Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The Grantee may either provide such a label, an example of which must be included in the application for equipment authorization, or, must provide adequate instructions along with the module which explain this requirement. In the latter case, a copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization.
(B) If the modular transmitter uses an electronic display of the FCC identification number, the information must be readily accessible and visible on the modular transmitter or on the device in which it is installed. If the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as the following:
Contains FCC certified transmitter module(s). Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The user manual must include instructions on how to access the electronic display. A copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. The modular transmitter must comply with any specific rules or operating requirements that ordinarily apply to a complete transmitter and the manufacturer must provide adequate instructions along with the module to explain any such requirements. A copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. 7 Refer to manual Y 8 The modular transmitter must comply with any applicable RF exposure requirements in its final configuration. Refer to MPE calculation in the Test report Y A limited modular approval may be granted for single or split modular transmitters that do not comply with all of the above requirements, e.g., shielding, minimum signaling amplitude, buffered modulation/data inputs, or power supply regulation, if the manufacturer can demonstrate by alternative means in the application for equipment authorization that the modular transmitter meets all the applicable Part 15 requirements under the operating conditions in which the transmitter will be used. Limited modular approval also may be granted in those instances where compliance with RF exposure rules is demonstrated only for particular product configurations. The applicant for certification must state how control of the end product into which the module will be installed will be maintained such that full compliance of the end product is always ensured.
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2013-05-09 | 2412 ~ 2472 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2012-08-21 | 2412 ~ 2472 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
3 | 2012-07-13 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
4 | 2012-04-13 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
5 | 2012-04-12 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
6 | 2012-04-02 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
7 | 2012-03-28 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
8 | 2012-03-15 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
9 | 2012-03-14 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
10 | 2012-03-07 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
11 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
12 | 2012-03-06 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
13 | 2012-03-01 | 2412 ~ 2472 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
14 | 2010-09-21 | 2412 ~ 2472 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
15 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
various | Effective |
2013-05-09
|
||||
various |
2012-08-21
|
|||||
various |
2012-07-13
|
|||||
various |
2012-04-13
|
|||||
various |
2012-04-12
|
|||||
various |
2012-04-02
|
|||||
various |
2012-03-28
|
|||||
various |
2012-03-15
|
|||||
various |
2012-03-14
|
|||||
various |
2012-03-07
|
|||||
various |
2012-03-06
|
|||||
various |
2012-03-01
|
|||||
various |
2010-09-21
|
|||||
various | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Broadcom Corporation
|
||||
various | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0007091952
|
||||
various | Physical Address |
270 Innovation Drive
|
||||
various |
San Jose
|
|||||
various |
San Jose, 95134
|
|||||
various |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
various | TCB Application Email Address |
L******@ul.com
|
||||
various |
t******@siemic.com
|
|||||
various |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
various |
c******@telefication.com
|
|||||
various |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
|||||
various |
c******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
various | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
various |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
various | Grantee Code |
QDS
|
||||
various | Equipment Product Code |
BRCM1050I
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
various | Name |
A**** L****
|
||||
various | Title |
Manager, Compliance Engineering
|
||||
various | Telephone Number |
40892********
|
||||
various | Fax Number |
408-5********
|
||||
various |
a******@broadcom.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
various | Firm Name |
Compliance Certification Services Inc.
|
||||
various |
Compliance Certification Services
|
|||||
various | Name |
R****** L********
|
||||
various |
T****** C******
|
|||||
various | Physical Address |
47173 Benicia Street
|
||||
various |
47173 Benicia St.
|
|||||
various |
Fremont, 94538
|
|||||
various |
Taiwan
|
|||||
various |
United States
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
510 7********
|
||||
various | Fax Number |
510 7********
|
||||
various |
r******@ccsrf.com
|
|||||
various |
t******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
various | Firm Name |
Compliance Certification Services Inc.
|
||||
various | Name |
K****** T****
|
||||
various | Physical Address |
No. 989-1 Wen Shan Rd, Shang shan village
|
||||
various |
Taiwan
|
|||||
various |
k******@ccsrf.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
various | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
various | No | |||||
various | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
various | No | |||||
various | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 11/03/2013 | ||||
various | 02/17/2013 | |||||
various | 01/09/2013 | |||||
various | 09/29/2012 | |||||
various | 09/23/2012 | |||||
various | 03/15/2011 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
various | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
various | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
various | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
various | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | 802.11g/DRAFT 802.11n WLAN PCI-E Minicard | ||||
various | 802.11g/DRAFT 802.11n WIRELESS LAN PCI-E MINICARD | |||||
various | 802.11g/n WIRELESS LAN PCI-E MINICARD | |||||
various | 802.11g/DRAFT 802.11n WLAN PCI-E MINICARD | |||||
various | 802.11g/DRAFT 802.11n WIRELESS LAN | |||||
various | 802.11g/Draft 802.11n WLAN PCI-E Minicard | |||||
various | 802.11g/DRAFT 802.11nWLAN PCI-E Minicard | |||||
various | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
various | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
various | Single Modular Approval | |||||
various | Limited Single Modular Approval | |||||
various | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
various | Original Equipment | |||||
various | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
various | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
various | Grant Comments | Class II Permissive Change to alternate a dipole and a monopole antennas as documented in this filing. Power Output Listed is Conducted. Modular Approval restricted to installation in broadband products by the OEM or designated OEM integrator. Only antennas documented in this filing may be used with this tramsmitter. The antennas used with this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with accepted multitransmitter product procedures. End-users and OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
various | C2PC for Portable Host - Notebook (Lenovo 20191 , 4941 family series ) Measured SAR is : 0.32W/kg Power Output Listed is Conducted. Modular Approval restricted to installation in broadband products by the OEM or designated OEM integrator. Only antennas documented in this filing may be used with this tramsmitter. The antennas used with this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with accepted multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
various | Power Output Listed is Conducted. Modular Approval restricted to installation in broadband products by the OEM or designated OEM integrator. Only antennas documented in this filing may be used with this transmitter. The antennas used with this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with accepted multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. (Date: 09/21/2010) Class II Change: This Class II Change incorporates this Module into a Dell P17G Laptop Computer as described in this filing. Any configuration other than the one described will require a separate approval. End end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest measured SAR for this Permissive Change filing is: 0.24 W/kg | |||||
various | Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. (Date: 09/21/2010) Class II Change: This Class II Change incorporates this Module into a Lenovo IdeaPad Z485 Laptop Computer as described in this filing. Any configuration other than the one described will require a separate approval. End end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest measured SAR for this Permissive Change filing is: 0.10 W/kg (body) | |||||
various | Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. (Date: 09/21/2010) Class II Change: This Class II Change incorporates this Module into a Lenovo IdeaPad Z585 Laptop Computer as described in this filing. Any configuration other than the one described will require a separate approval. End end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest measured SAR for this Permissive Change filing is: 0.29 W/kg (Body). | |||||
various | Modular approval. Output power listed is conducted. This module may only be installed by the OEM or an OEM integrator. Only antenna(s) documented in this filings may be used with this transmitter. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. (Date: 09/21/2010) Class II Change: This Class II Change incorporates this Module into a Lenovo Ideal Pad Y580 Laptop Computer as described in this filing. Any configuration other than the one described will require a separate approval. End end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest measured SAR for this Permissive Change filing is: 0.60 W/kg. | |||||
various | Power Output Listed is Conducted. Modular Approval restricted to installation in broadband products by the OEM or designated OEM integrator. Only antennas documented in this filing may be used with this tramsmitter. The antennas used with this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with accepted multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. (Date: 09/21/2010) Class II Change: This Class II Change incorporates this Module into a Lenovo Ideal Pad Y480 Laptop Computer as described in this filing. Any configuration other than the one described will require a separate approval. End end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest measured SAR for this Permissive Change filing is: 1.04 W/kg. | |||||
various | Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. (Date: 09/21/2010) Class II Change: This Class II Change incorporates this Module into a Lenovo IdeaPad U410 Laptop Computer as described in this filing. Any configuration other than the one described will require a separate approval. End end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest measured SAR for this Permissive Change filing is: 0.19 W/kg | |||||
various | Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. (Date: 09/21/2010) Class II Change: This Class II Change incorporates this Module into a Lenovo IdeaPad U310 Laptop Computer as described in this filing. Any configuration other than the one described will require a separate approval. End end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest measured SAR for this Permissive Change filing is: 0.29 W/kg | |||||
various | Power Output Listed is Conducted. Modular Approval restricted to installation in broadband products by the OEM or designated OEM integrator. Only antennas documented in this filing may be used with this tramsmitter. The antennas used with this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with accepted multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. (Date: 09/20/2010) Class II Change: This Class II Change incorporates this Module into a Lenovo Ideal Pad Z480 Laptop Computer as described in this filing. Any configuration other than the one described will require a separate approval. End end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest measured SAR for this Permissive Change filing is: 0.73 W/kg. | |||||
various | Power Output Listed is Conducted. Modular Approval restricted to installation in broadband products by the OEM or designated OEM integrator. Only antennas documented in this filing may be used with this tramsmitter. The antennas used with this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with accepted multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. (Date: 09/21/2010) Class II Change: This Class II Change incorporates this Module into a Lenovo Ideal Pad Z580 Laptop Computer as described in this filing. Any configuration other than the one described will require a separate approval. End end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest measured SAR for this Permissive Change filing is: 0.38 W/kg | |||||
various | Power Output Listed is Conducted. Modular Approval restricted to installation in broadband products by the OEM or designated OEM integrator. Only antennas documented in this filing may be used with this tramsmitter. The antennas used with this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with accepted multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. (Date: 09/21/2010) Class II Change: This Class II Change incorporates this Module into a Lenovo Ideal Pad Z380 Laptop Computer as described in this filing. Any configuration other than the one described will require a separate approval. End end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest measured SAR for this Permissive Change filing is: 0.50 W/kg. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change filing to add 2-way BIOS Lock for end user installation in qualified notebook computer platforms. Power Output Listed is Conducted. Modular Approval restricted to installation in broadband products by the OEM or designated OEM integrator or when two way BIOS Lock is employed to allow end user installation. Only antennas documented in this filing may be used with this transmitter. The antennas used with this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with accepted multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
various | Power Output Listed is Conducted. Modular Approval restricted to installation in broadband products by the OEM or designated OEM integrator. Only antennas documented in this filing may be used with this tramsmitter. The antennas used with this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with accepted multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
various | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
various | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
various | Firm Name |
DEKRA Testing and Certification (Suzhou) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
various |
Cerpass Technology (SuZhou) Co., Ltd.
|
|||||
various |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
various |
Compliance Certification Services Inc.
|
|||||
various |
Compliance Certification Services
|
|||||
various | Name |
J******** P****
|
||||
various |
M**** C****
|
|||||
various |
K****** L****
|
|||||
various |
W****** C******
|
|||||
various |
H**** L****
|
|||||
various |
T**** C****
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
86-51******** Extension:
|
||||
various |
86-05******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
+886-******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
886-3******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
886-2******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
510-7********
|
|||||
various | Fax Number |
86-51********
|
||||
various |
86-05********
|
|||||
various |
+886-********
|
|||||
various |
886-3********
|
|||||
various |
886-2********
|
|||||
various |
510-6********
|
|||||
various |
j******@quietek.com.cn
|
|||||
various |
m******@cerpass.net
|
|||||
various |
k******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
various |
w******@ccsrf.com
|
|||||
various |
h******@sgs.com
|
|||||
various |
t******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2472.00000000 | 0.3396000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2472.00000000 | 0.3396000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3396000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3400000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3400000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3396000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3396000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3300000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3400000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3396000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3396000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
12 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3396000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
13 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2472.00000000 | 0.3396000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
14 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2472.00000000 | 0.3396000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 1 | 15B | CC |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC